environmental impact assessment and emp report - Gujarat ...

DRAFT

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

AND EMP REPORT

FOR

PROPOSED EXPANSION OF PHARMACEUTICAL PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURING UNIT 138 MTPM

(EXISTING 3.25 MTPM AND PROPOSED 134.75 MTPM)

AT

BLOCK NO. 155/1, 159, CHHATRAL-KADI ROAD, VILLAGE DHANOT,

TALUKA KALOL, DISTRICT GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT

PROJECT CATEGORY: A,

5(f), SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMICALS INDUSTRY

STUDY PERIOD:

OCTOBER TO DECEMBER, 2016

PROJECT PROPONENT:

ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES

PREPARED BY:

en-VISIOn ENVIRO TECHNOLOGIES PVT. LTD.

2nd

FLOOR, SHRI RAM COMPLEX, ABIVE BANK OF INDIA,

NEAR KARGIL CHOWK, SURAT-DUMAS ROAD,

PIPLOD, SURAT-395007

GUJARAT.

Phone No.: (0261) 2223003, 2224004

Email Add.: [email protected]

Website: www.en-vision.in

Accreditation by

QCI / NABET Certificate No. 1417/IA 003

ISO 9001:2008 Certificate No. BN9180/8576:0614 JULY, 2017

171011_116034_170717

OR

BI

T

PH

AR

MA

L

AB

OR

AT

OR

IE

S

en-vιsι�n

M/S. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES, GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT.

Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA/EMP Report

“Proposed Expansion of Pharmaceutical Products Manufacturing Unit” at Block No. 155/1, 159, Chhatral-

Kadi Road, Village Dhanot, Taluka Kalol, District Gandhinagar, Gujarat.

I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA.

EIA Coordinator : Synthetic Organic Chemicals Industry

Name : Smitha Rajesh

Signature and Date : 25/04/2016

Period of involvement : October 2016 to December, 2016

Contact information : [email protected] Ph. No. 0261 - 2223003

Functional Area Experts

Sr. No. Functional

Areas Name of the

Expert/S Involvement

Signature Period Task

1

AP

WP

SHW AQ

Nihar Doctor October to

December,

2016

Site visit, selection of monitoring

locations, selection of parameters,

evaluation of air quality results, impact

identification and mitigation measures

suggestion.

Site visit, Selection of monitoring

locations for water quality, evaluation

water quality results, evaluation of

proposed ETP treatment scheme, impact

identification and mitigation measures

suggestion of the project.

Site visit, Identification of solid and

Hazardous Wastes generated storage

facility and disposal management.

Site visit, selection of monitoring

locations, supervision of air quality

modeling and prediction, identification

of impacts.

2 LU Dr. Y.

Ramamohan

October to

December,

2016

Collecting GPS reading of proposed site,

geo reference of toposheets and satellite

image, preparation of base map from

toposheets, preparation of landuse/land

cover map from the satellite image.

Identification of impacts and suggest

mitigation measures.

3 SE Dr. Rumjhum Ray

Caudhuary

October to

December,

2016

Prepared list of villages present within

study area, Collected primary and

secondary data, identify impact of

project on community, prepare CSR

activities, Prepared SE report.

en-vιsι�n


Sr. No. Functional

Areas Name of the

Expert/S Involvement

Signature Period Task

4 EB Dr. Manoj Eledath

October to

December,

2016

Identified locations for the sample

collection of terrestrial biodiversity on

the basis of Land Use and Land cover

map.

Identified flora and fauna within study

area. Identification of Impacts and

suggested mitigation measures.

Suggested the conservation plan for the

schedule-1 fauna.

5 HG Naresh Goar

October to

December,

2016

Determine the groundwater flow

direction by measuring the water level in

existing water wells, study the

groundwater development and hydrology

in the study area.

6 N Haneesh Panicker October to

December,

2016

Identifying possible source of Noise

pollution from process equipments and

other transportation activity. Delineating

measures to curb Noise Pollution.

Monitoring related work.

7 RH Sundara Rajulu October to

December,

2016

Studied project proposal, Identified

potential hazards of proposed activities.

Suggested safety measures for Hazards.

Name of Laboratory: En-Tech Laboratories

NABL/MoEF Certificate No.: T-3750

Period of Involvement: October to December, 2016

en-vιsι�n


Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/ authorized person

I, Nihar Doctor, hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA of proposed of

Synthetic organic Chemicals Industry at Block No. 155/1, 159, Chhatral-Kadi Road, Village Dhanot,

Taluka Kalol, District Gandhinagar, Gujarat by M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories.

I also confirm that the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any mis-leading information

mentioned in this statement.

Signature :

Name : Nihar Doctor

Designation : Director

Name of the EIA consultant

organization

: Envision Enviro Technologies Pvt. Ltd.

NABET Certificate No. & Issue

Date

: NABET/EIA/1417/IA 003 valid up to December 03, 2017

en-vιsι�n

M/S. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES, GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT I - 1

INDEX

Se. No. Title Page No.

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY OF EIA REPORT

CHAPTER-1 : INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE OF EIA 1-1

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT 1-1

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT 1-1

1.4 SCOPE OF THE STUDY 1-1

1.5 STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT 1-2

CHAPTER-2 : PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 BRIEF PROJECT DISCRIPTION 2-1

2.2 TYPE OF PROJECT 2.1

2.3 NEED OF PROJECT 2-1

2.4 LOCATION 2-1

2.4.1 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS 2-6

2.5 MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION 2-8

2.5.1 PROJECT COST 2-8

2.6 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND IMPLEMENTATION 2-8

2.7 TECHNICAL AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2-9

2.7.1 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 2-9

2.7.2 PRODUCTION ACTIVITIES 2-9

2.7.3 RAW MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS 2-10

2.7.4 MANUFACTURING PROCESS 2-11

2.7.5 SOLVENT MANAGEMENT 2-35

2.8 COMPONENTS OF PROJECT 2-35

2.8.1 LAND 2-35

2.8.2 POWER REQUIREMENT 2-35

2.8.3 FUEL REQUIREMENT 2-35

2.8.4 MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS 2-36

2.8.5 WATER SOURCE, UTILIZATION AND WASTE WATER 2-36

2.8.6 AIR POLLUTION 2-37

2.8.6.1 SOURCE OF FUGITIVE OR SECONDARY EMISSIONS 2-38

2.8.7 NOISE POLLUTION 2-38

2.8.8 LAND/SOIL POLLUTION 2-38

2.9 ENVIRONMENNTAL MITIGATION MEASURES 2-38

2.9.1 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR WATER POLLUTION 2-38

2.9.1.1 DETAILS OF EXISTING ETP 2-39

2.9.2 MITIGATION MEASRURES FOR AIR POLLUTION 2-40

2.9.2.1 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR FUGITIVE OR SECONDARY EMISSIONS 2-41

2.9.3 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR NOISE POLLUTION 2-41

2.9.4 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR LAND/SOIL POLLUTION 2-41

en-vιsι�n



CHAPTER-3 : BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE STUDY AREA 3-1

3.2 PERIOD OF MONITORING 3-1

3.3 COMPONENTS AND METHODOLOGY 3-1

3.4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL DATA 3-3

3.4.1 METEOROLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 3-3

3.4.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT 3-6

3.4.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT 3-8

3.4.3.1 PHYSICO-CHEMI CAL CHARACTERISTICS OF WATER 3-12

3.4.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT 3-12

3.4.4.1 TRAFFIC STUDY 3-14

3.4.5 SOIL ENVIRONMENT 3-15

3.4.5.1 SOIL QUALITY INTERPRETATION 3-15

3.4.6 LANDUSE 3-16

3.4.7 SOCIO - ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT 3-20

3.4.8 DESCRIPTION OF THE BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 3-24

3.5 GEO HYDROLOGY 3-36

3.5.1 GENERAL GEOLOGY 3-36

3.5.2 DRAINAGE PATTERN OF THE AREA 3-38

3.5.3 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT 3-38

CHAPTER-4 : ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS 4-1

4.2 PREDICTION AND EVALUATION OF IMPACTS 4-1

4.3 AIR ENVIRONMENT 4-2

4.3.1 DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 4-2

4.3.2 MITIGATION MEASURES 4-9

4.4 WATER ENVIRONMENT 4-10

4.4.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4-10

4.4.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4-10

4.5 SOIL ENVIRONMENT 4-10

4.5.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4-11

4.5.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4-11

4.6 NOISE ENVIRONMENT 4-11

4.6.1 DETAILS OF NOISE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 4-11

4.6.2 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS 4-11

4.6.3 OPERATION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES 4-11

4.6.4 IMPACT OF THE TRANSPORTATION 4-12

4.7 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND ITS MITIGATION

MEASURES FOR LAND USE

4-12

4.7.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT 4-12

4.7.2 IMPACT OF LAND USE 4-12

4.7.3 MITIGATION MEASURES OF LAND USE 4-12

en-vιsι�n



4.8 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT 4-12

4.8.1 NATURAL VEGETATION 4-12

4.8.2 CROPS 4-12

4.8.3 FOREST, NATIONAL PARKS / SANCTUARIES 4-13

4.9 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS 4-13

4.10 PLACES OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL/HISTORICAL/RELIGIOUS/TOURIST

INTEREST

4-13

4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD 4-13

4.12 MATRIX REPRESENTATION 4-16

4.12.1 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART 4-16

CHAPTER-5 : ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

5.1 ALTERNATIVES OF TECHNOLOGY 5-1

5.2 ALTERNATIVES OF SITE 5-1

5.2.1 DESCRIPTION 5-1

5.2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF ADVERSE IMPACT 5-1

5.2.3 MITIGATION MEASURES 5-1

5.2.4 SELECTION OF SITE 5-1

5.3 NO PROJECT ALTERNATIVE 5-2

CHAPTER-6 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM \

6.1 INTRODUCTION 6-1

6.2 MONITORING SCHEDULE DURING OPERATION PHASE 6-1

6.3 WORK ZONE MONITORING ARRANGEMENTS FOR HAZARDOUS

CHEMICALS 6-2

CHAPTER-7 : ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION/HEARING 7-1

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT 7-1

7.2.1 INTRODUCTION 7-1

7.2.2 DETAILS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESS 7-2

7.2.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING 7-2

7.2.3.1 ANTIDOTES OF MAJOR PRDUCTS/RAW MATERIALS 7-5

7.2.3.2 ACTION PLAN FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR THE STORAGE OF

MATERIALS

7-5

7.2.4 HAZARD AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES 7-6

7.2.5 RISK IDENTIFICATION AND ANALYSIS 7-7

7.2.5.1 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE LOSS ACCIDENT SCENARIOS 7-7

7.2.5.2 DAMAGE CRITERIA 7-8

7.2.5.2.1 SOFTWARE USED FOR CALCULATIONS 7-11

7.2.5.3 VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS 7-11

7.2.5.4 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO 7-12

7.2.6 RISK PREVENTION AND RISK MITIGATION 7-19

en-vιsι�n



7.2.6.1 PREVENTIVE MEASURES 7-19

7.2.6.2 MITIGATION MEASURES 7-22

7.2.6.3 DO’S AND DON’TS 7-26

7.2.7 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN 7-27

7.2.7.1 OBJECTIVES OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 7-27

7.2.7.2 BASIS OF PLAN AND HANDLING OF EMERGENCY 7-27

7.2.7.3 INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY AND SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS 7-28

7.2.7.4 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYEES 7-28

7.2.7.5 INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS 7-28

7.2.7.6 MITIGATION OF CONSEQUENCES DURING MAJOR ACCIDENT 7-29

7.2.7.7 EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTRE WITH LIST OF EQUIPMENT AND

ACCESSORIES

7-29

7.2.7.8 INFORMATION REGARDING KEY PERSONS AND THEIR

RESPONSIBILITIES DURING EMERGENCY

7-30

7.2.7.9 EMERGENCY ORGANIZATION FOR IDLE HOURS 7-33

7.2.7.10 LIST OF IMPORTANT AUTHORITIES WITH THEIR ROLE IN EMERGENCY

AND TELEPHONE NUMBERS

7-33

7.2.7.11 INFORMATION ABOUT EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 7-33

7.2.7.12 ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM DETAILS 7-33

7.2.7.13 OUT SIDE IMPORTANT ADDRESSES AND PHONE NUMBERS 7-33

7.2.7.14 REHERSAL AND UPDATION OF PLAN 7-34

7.2.7.15 INFORMATION ON ASSEMBLY POINTS 7-34

7.2.8 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM FOR THE PROJECT 7-34

CHAPTER-8 : PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE 8-1

8.2 SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE 8-1

8.3 EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES 8-2

CHAPTER-9: ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

9.1 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS 9-1

CHAPTER-10: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 DESCRIPTION OF EMP 10-1

10.1.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT 10-1

10.1.1.1 FUGITIVE EMISSION & CONTROL TECHNOLOGIES 10-2

10.1.1.2 ODOUR MANAGEMENT PLAN 10-3

10.1.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT 10-3

10.1.3 NOISE ENVIRONMENT 10-4

10.1.4 SOIL ENVIRONMENT 10-4

10.1.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT 10-4

10.1.6 ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 10-5

10.1.7 HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT 10-7

en-vιsι�n



10.2 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY 10-10

10.3

CONCEPT OF WASTE-MINIMISATION, RECYCLE/REUSE/RECOVER

TECHNIQUES, ENERGY CONSERVATION, AND NATURAL RESOURCE

CONSERVATION

10-10

10.4 DESCRIPTION OF ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS 10-10

10.4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL 10-10

10.4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY 10-11

10.4.3 REPORTING SYSTEM TO THE DIRECTORS 10-11

10.4.4 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP 10-12

10.5 OCCUPATIONAL WORK ZONE MONITORING 10-12

CHAPTER-11: SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

CHAPTER-12 : DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED

en-vιsι�n


LIST OF TABLES

TABLE

NO. TITLE

PAGE

NO.

2.1 DISTANCE OF NEAREST KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES FROM SITE 2-6

2.2 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT 2-8

2.3 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURE (EPCM) 2-8

2.4 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE 2-9

2.5 CAPACITY OF PRODUCTS 2-9

2.6 DETAILS OF RAW MATERIALS 2-10

2.7 SOLVENT DETAILS 2-35

2.8 DETAILED LAND USE BREAKUP 2-35

2.9 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2-35

2.10 DETAILS OF WATER CONSUMPTION 2-36

2.11 DETAILS OF WASTE WATER GENERATION 2-36

2.12 DETAILS OF STACKS 2-37

2.13 DETAILS SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION 2-38

2.14 DETAILS SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION 2-40

3.1 SITE SPECIFIC METEOROLOGICAL DATA (1ST OCT TO 31ST DEC, 2016) 3-5

3.2 DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS 3-6

3.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STATUS 3-7

3.4 DETAILS OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER MONITORING

LOCATIONS

3-8

3.5 BASELINE GROUND WATER QUALITY 3-9

3.6 BASELINE SURFACE WATER QUALITY 3-10

3.7 DETAILS OF LOCATIONS FOR BACKGROUND NOISE MONITORING

STATIONS

3-13

3.8 BACKGROUND NOISE LEVELS 3-13

3.9 NOISE LEVELS DUE TO TRANSPORTATION 3-14

3.10 SAMPLING LOCATIONS OF SOIL MONITORING 3-15

3.11 PHYSICO-CHEMICALS CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL 3-15

3.12 AREA STATISTICS OF LANDUSE/LAND COVER MAP 3-17

3.13 VILLAGE WISE DEMOGRAPHICAL DETAILS IN PIA 3-21

3.14 TREE SPECIES IN THE STUDY AREA 3-27

3.15 SHRUBS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA 3-28

3.16 HERBS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA 3-29

3.17 CLIMBERS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA 3-31

3.18 BIRDS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA 3-33

3.19 BUTTERFLIES OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA 3-35

3.20 REPTILES OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA 3-35

3.21 MAMMALS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA 3-35

3.22 SPECIES PROVIDED PROTECTION AS PER WILD LIFE PROTECTION ACT

1972 3-36

3.23 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT OF DISTRICT 3-39

en-vιsι�n


TABLE

NO. TITLE

PAGE

NO.

4.1 DETAILS OF STACK EMISSION DATA 4-3

4.2 MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION OF PM, SO2, NOx & HCl 4-4

4.3 SUMMARY OF ISCST3 MODEL OUTPUT FOR POLLUTANTS 4-9

4.4 POTENTIAL IMPACTS & MITIGATIVE MEASURES 4-14

4.5 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION MATRIX 4-16

4.6 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT MATRIX 4-17

4.7 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART 4-17

6.1 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 6-1

7.1 HAZARDOUS CHARACTERISTICS & STORAGE OF RAW MATERIALS 7-2

7.2 LIST OF HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS INVENTRY & PROPERTIES 7-4

7.3 RISK ANALYSIS 7-4

7.4 ANTIDOTES OF CHEMICALS 7-5

7.5 HAZARDS AND ITS CONTROL MEASURE 7-6

7.6 DAMAGES TO HUMAN LIFE DUE TO HEAT RADIATION 7-9

7.7 EFFECTS DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITY 7-9

7.8 DAMAGE DUE TO OVERPRESSURES 7-9

7.9 WEATHER CONDITIONS 7-11

7.10 LIST OF PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 7-22

7.11 LIST OF PROPOSED FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENTS 7-25

7.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH MONITORING 7-34

8.1 PROPOSED CSR ACTIVITIES 8-2

10.1 RECOMMENDED PLANT SPECIES FOR GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

ALONG THE BOUNDARY OF AS A WIND BARRIER AS WELL AS TO

PREVENT DUST POLLUTION

10-6

10.2 LIST OF SUITABLE ORNAMENTAL CLIMBERS/ SHRUBS AS

PLANTATION INSIDE THE GARDEN AND OPEN SPACES BETWEEN

DIFFERENT UNITS OF PROJECT SITE

10-6

10.3 BUDGETARY OUTLETS OF GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT FOR FIVE

YEARS

10-7

10.4 WATER REQUIREMENT 10-8

10.5 RAINWATER AVAILABLE FOR HARVESTING 10-8

10.6 WATER BALANCE 10-8

10.7 COST OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES (RS. IN LAKHS) 10-12

en-vιsι�n


LIST OF FIGURES

Figure

No. Title

Page

No.

2.1 DETAILED MAP OF GANDHINAGAR DISTRICT SHOWING PROJECT

LOCATION

2-2

2.2 GOOGLE IMAGE OF THE PROJECT SITE 2-3

2.3 PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE PROJECT SITE 2-4

2.4 LAYOUT OF THE PLANT 2-5

2.5 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS 2-7

2.6 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM 2-37

2.7 SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM OF PROPOSED ETP 2-40

3.1 LOCATION MAP OF THE PROJECT SITE WITH STUDY AREA 3-2

3.2(A) PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTIONS (0300 UTC) 3-4

3.2(B) PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTIONS (1200 UTC) 3-4

3.3 WIND ROSE DIAGRAM 3-5

3.4 LAND USE / LAND COVER MAP OF 10 KM RADIUS FROM STUDY AREA 3-18

3.5 SATELLITE IMAGERY OF THE STUDY AREA (10 KM RADIUS) 3-19

3.6 STUDY AREA MAP 3-26

3.7(A) GENERAL GEOLOGY OF GANDHINAGAR DISTRICT 3-37

3.7(B) GENERAL GEOLOGY OF MAHESANA DISTRICT 3-38

3.8 WATER LEVEL MAP, GANDHINAGAR 3-39

3.9 LOCATION OF AMBIENT AIR MONITORING STATIONS 3-40

3.10 LOCATIONS OF GROUND WATER SAMPLING STATIONS 3-41

3.11 LOCATIONS OF SURFACE WATER SAMPLING STATIONS 3-42

3.12 LOCATIONS OF NOISE SAMPLING STATIONS 3-43

3.13 LOCATIONS OF SOIL SAMPLING STATIONS 3-44

4.1 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE PM CONC. (µg/m3) 4-5

4.2 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE SO2 CONC. (µg/m3) 4-6

4.3 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE NOX CONC. (µg/m3) 4-7

4.4 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE HCl CONC. (µg/m3) 4-8

10.1 THE GENERAL DESIGN OF THE RECHARGE WELL 10-9

10.2 AN ORGANOGRAM OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL 10-11

en-vιsι�n


LIST OF ANNEXURE

Annexure

No. Title

Page

No.

I TERMS OF REFERENCE LETTER AWARDED BY EAC A-1

II LAND POSSESION DOCUMENT A-10

III TSDF/INCINERATION MEMBERSHIP CERTIFICATE A-14

IV CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA A-16

V RAW DATA OF AAQM A-18

VI NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS (NAAQS) (2009) A-22

VII INDIAN STANDARDS/SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRIINKING WATER IS:

10500-1991

A-234

VIII CLASSIFICATION OF INLAND SURFACE WATER (CPCB STANDARDS) A-27

IX CPCB RECOMMENDATIONS FOR COMMUNITY NOISE EXPOSURE (1989) A-28

X DAMAGE RISK CRITERIA FOR HEARING LOSS OCCUPATIONAL

SAFETY& HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA)

A-29

XI ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY A-30

XII NOC & CCA OF EXISTING UNIT A-31

XIII COMPLIANCE REPORT A-39

XIV SAMPLE OF REGISTER FORM 32 AND FORM 33 A-43

XV ACKNOWLEDGEMENT COPY FOR GROUND WATER PERMISSION TO

CGWA

A-45

XVI MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET FOR ALL THE CHEMICALS A-47

en-vιsι�n

M/S. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES, GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT T-1

COMPLIANCE OF TERMS OF REFERENCES (TOR)

TERMS OF REFERENCES (TOR) AWARDED BY: Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate

Change (MoEF&CC)

DATE OF TOR: 2nd August, 2016

TOR LETTER NO.: J-11011/115/2016-IA II (I)

TORS AND ITS COMPLIANCE

NO. TERMS OF REFERENCE COMPLIANCE

SPECIFIC TOR

1. Details on solvents to be used, measures for solvent

recovery and for emissions control.

Refer section 2.7.5 on page no. 2-35 of

Chapter-2.

2. Details of process emissions from the proposed unit

and its arrangement to control.


Chapter-2.

3.

Ambient air quality data should include VOC, other

process-specific pollutants* like NH3*, chlorine*,

HCI*, HBr*, H2S*, HF*, CS2 etc., (*-as applicable)


Chapter-3.

4. Work zone monitoring arrangements for hazardous

chemicals.

Refer section 6.3 on page no. 6-2 of

Chapter-6.

5.

Detailed effluent treatment scheme including

segregation of effluent streams for units adopting

'Zero' liquid discharge.


Chapter-2.

6. Action plan for odour control to be submitted. Refer section 10.1.1.2 on page no. 10-3 of

Chapter-10.

7.

A copy of the Memorandum of Understanding

signed with cement manufacturers indicating clearly

that they co-process organic solid/hazardous waste

generated.

Not Applicable

8.

Authorization/Membership for the disposal of liquid

effluent in CETP and solid/hazardous waste in

TSDF, if any.


Chapter-2 and refer annexure-III.

9. Material Safety Data Sheet for all the Chemicals are

being used/will is used.


Chapter-7 and refer annexure- XV.

10. Authorization/Membership for the disposal of

solid/hazardous waste in TSDF.


Chapter-2 and refer annexure-III.

11. Details of incinerator if to be installed.

There is no need to install captive

incinerator as common incinerator facility

is available for disposal of waste.

Membership for the same will be obtained.

12.

Risk assessment for storage and handling of

hazardous chemicals/solvents. Action plan for

handling & safety system to be incorporated.

Refer section no. 7.2.5 on page no. 7-7 and refer section no. 7.2.3.2 on page no. 7-5 of

chapter- 7.

13. Arrangements for ensuring health and safety of

workers engaged in handling of toxic materials. Refer 7.2.8 on page no. 7-34 of Chapter-7.

14. Details on solvents to be used, measures for solvent

recovery and for emissions control.


Chapter-2.

ADDITIONAL TOR

i

Public hearing to be conducted and issues raised and

commitments made by the project proponent on the

same should be included in EIA/EMP Report in the

form of tabular chart with financial budget for

Refer section 7.1 on page No. 7-1 of

chapter- 7.

en-vιsι�n



complying with the commitments made.

ii No wood or coal to be used in existing and proposed

boiler

Refer section 2.8.3 on page No. 2-35 of

chapter-2.

iii No groundwater to be extracted for proposed

expansion as well as existing plant


chapter-2 and annexure-XV.

iv Water requirement to be met from surface water

management/ collection and rain harvesting, etc.


chapter-2 and annexure-XV.

GENERIC TOR

1. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Refer executive summary of EIA report

page S-1.

2. INTRODUCTION Refer sections of Chapter- 1.

i. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET

accreditation Refer section of Chapter-12.

ii. Information about the project proponent Refer section 1.2 on page no. 1-1 of

Chapter-1.

iii. Importance and benefits of the project


chapter-2 and subsequent sections of

Chapter-8.

3. PROJECT DESCRIPTION

i. Cost of project and time of completion.

Refer section 2.5.1 on page no. 2-8 and

section 2.6 on page no. 2-8 and 2-9 of

Chapter-2.

ii. Products with capacities for the proposed project. Refer section 2.7.2 on page no 2-9 of

Chapter-2.

iii.

If expansion project, details of existing products

with capacities and whether adequate land is

available for expansion, reference of earlier EC, if

any.

Refer section 2.7.2 on page no. 2-9 and

refer section 2.8.1 on page no. 2-35 of

Chapter-2.

iv. List of raw materials required and their source along

with mode of transportation


Chapter-2.

v. Other chemicals and materials required with

quantities and storage capacities.


Chapter-7.

vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste

generation and their management.

Refer section 2.8.6 on page no. 2-37,

section 2.8.5 on page no. 2-36 and section

2.9.1 on page no. 2-38, section 2.8.8 on

page no. 2-38 of Chapter-2.

vii.

Requirement of water, power, with source of supply,

status of approval, water balance diagram, man-

power requirement (regular and contract).

Refer section 2.8.5 on page no. 2-36,

section 2.8.2 on page no. 2-35 and 2.8.4 on

page no. 2-36 of Chapter-2.

Procedure for obtaining all necessary

permissions is under process.

viii.

Process description along with major equipments

and machineries, process flow sheet (quantities)

from raw material to products to be provided.


Chapter-2.

ix. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety

systems.


Chapter-7.

x.

Expansion/modernization proposals: a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s)

including Amendments thereto obtained for the

project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as

an Annexure. A certified copy of the latest

Monitoring Report of the Regional Office of the

Ministry of Environment and Forests as per

circular dated 30th May, 2012 on the status of

Project was established before publication

of EIA notification 2006.

CCA copy of existing unit is enclosed as

annexure-XII on page no. A-31 and CCA

compliance is enclosed as annexure-XIII

on page no. A-39.

en-vιsι�n



compliance of conditions stipulated in all the

existing environmental clearances including

Amendments shall be provided. In addition,

status of compliance of Consent to Operate for

the ongoing existing operation of the project

from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP

report.

b. In case the existing project has not obtained

environmental clearance, reasons for not taking

EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification

1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be

provided. Copies of Consent to Establish/No

Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in

case of units operating prior to EIA Notification

2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005- 2006)

obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted.

Further, compliance report to the conditions of

consents from the SPCB shall be submitted.

4. SITE DETAILS

i.

Location of the project site covering village,

Taluka/Tehsil, District and State, Justification for

selecting the site, whether other sites were

considered.


Chapter-2 and also refer section 5.2 on

page no. 5-1 of Chapter-5 for the selecting

site.

ii.

A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km and

site location on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an

A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areas and

environmentally sensitive places).


Chapter-2 and figure-2.5 on page no. 2-7 of

Chapter-2.

iii. Details w.r.t. option analysis for selection of site Refer section 5.2 on page no. 5-1 of

Chapter-5.

iv. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site. Refer section 2.4 on page no. 2-1 of

Chapter-2.

v. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site. Refer section 2.4 on page no. 2-1 and

figure no. 2.2 on page no. 2-3 of Chapter-2.

vi.

Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as

proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area,

greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an

Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial

Area indicating location of unit within the Industrial

area/Estate.

Refer section 2.4 on page no. 2-1 and


vii.

Photographs of the proposed and existing (if

applicable) plant site. If existing, show photographs

of plantation/greenbelt, in particular.

Refer section 2.4 on page no. 2-1 and


viii.

Landuse break-up of total land of the project site

(identified and acquired), government/private –

agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies,

settlements, etc shall be included. (not required for

industrial area).


Chapter-2.

ix.

A list of major industries with name and type within

study area (10km radius) shall be incorporated.

Land use details of the study area


Chapter-2.

x. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of

the study area shall be included.


Chapter-3.

xi. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5 km radius

of study area. If the site is within 1 km radius of any


Chapter-3.

en-vιsι�n



major river, peak and lean season river discharge as

well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak

rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of Flood

Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level

of the river shall also be provided. (mega green field

projects)

xii.

Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not

complete, stage of the acquisition process and

expected time of complete possession of the land.


Chapter-2.

xiii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state

Government policy

This project does not involve rehabilitation

or replacement so no R&R is required.

5. FOREST AND WILDLIFE RELATED ISSUES (IF APPLICABLE):

i.

Permission and approval for the use of forest land

(forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of

the State Forest Department. (if applicable).

Not Applicable

ii.

Landuse map based on High resolution satellite

imagery (GPS) of the proposed site delineating the

forestland (in case of projects involving forest land

more than 40 ha).

Not Applicable

iii.

Status of Application submitted for obtaining the

stage I forestry clearance along with latest status

shall be submitted.

Not Applicable

iv.

The projects to be located within 10 km of the

National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves,

Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project

proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated

by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features

vis-à-vis the project location and the

recommendations or comments of the Chief

Wildlife Warden-thereon.

Not Applicable

v.

Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by

the Chief Wildlife Warden of the State Government

for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in

the study area

Not Applicable

vi.

Copy of application submitted for clearance under

the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing

Committee of the National Board for Wildlife

Not Applicable

6. ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

i.

Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the

project site and site-specific micro-meteorological

data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly

wind speed and direction and rainfall.


Chapter- 4 and refer section 3.4.1 on page

no.3-3 of Chapter-3.

ii.

AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10,

PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other parameters relevant

to the project shall be collected. The monitoring

stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take

into account the pre-dominant wind direction,

population zone and sensitive receptors including

reserved forests.


Chapter-3.

iii.

Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of

all stations as per frequency given in the NAQQM

Notification of Nov. 2009 along with – min, max,

average and 98% values for each of the AAQ

parameters from data of all AAQ stations should be


Chapter-3 and Annexure-V.

en-vιsι�n



provided as an annexure to the EIA Report.

iv.

Surface water quality of nearby River (100m

upstream and downstream of discharge point) and

other surface drains at eight locations as per

CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.


Chapter-3.

v.

Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of

river identified by the CPCB/MoEF&CC, if yes

give details.

No, site does not fall near to polluted

stretch of river identified by the CPCB

/MOEF&CC.

vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations

shall be included.


Chapter-3.

vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the

study area.


Chapter-3.

viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. Refer section 3.4.5 on page no. 3-15 of

Chapter-3.

ix.

Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency

of vehicles for transportation of materials, additional

traffic due to proposed project, parking arrangement

etc.

Refer section 3.4.4.1 on page no. 3-14 of

Chapter-3.

x.

Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial

and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given

with special reference to rare, endemic and

endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are found

within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan

shall be prepared and furnished.


Chapter-3.

xi. Socio-economic status of the study area. Refer section 3.4.7 on page no. 3-20 of

Chapter-3.

7. IMPACT AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

i.

Assessment of ground level concentration of

pollutants from the stack emission based on site-

specific meteorological features. In case the project

is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling

shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain

characteristics for determining the potential impacts

of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all

sources of emissions (including transportation) on

the AAQ of the area shall be assessed. Details of the

model used and the input data used for modelling

shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall

be plotted on a location map showing the location of

project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if

any.


Chapter-4.

ii. Water Quality modeling – in case of discharge in

water body. Not applicable

iii.

Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end

products on the surrounding environment shall be

assessed and provided. In this regard, options for

transport of raw materials and finished products and

wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail cum road

transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be

examined.


Chapter-4.

iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different Refer section 2.9.1 on page no. 2-38 of

en-vιsι�n



plant operations, extent recycled and reused for

different purposes shall be included. Complete

scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of

untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed

standards of discharge under E (P) Rules.

Chapter-2.

v. Details of stack emission and action plan for control

of emissions to meet standards.


Chapter-2.

vi. Measures for fugitive emission control Refer section 10.1.1.1 on page no. 10-2 of

Chapter-10.

vii.

Details of hazardous waste generation and their

storage, utilization and management. Copies of

MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous

waste in cement plant shall also be included. EMP

shall include the concept of waste minimization,

recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy

conservation, and natural resource conservation.


Chapter-2.


Chapter-10.

viii.

Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per

Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of

action shall be provided.

Fly Ash will be sent to TSDF for disposal

or sent to brick manufacturer. Refer section

2.8.8 on page no. 2-38 of Chapter-2.

ix.

Action plan for the green belt development plan in

33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per

ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation,

planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green

belt shall be around the project boundary and a

scheme for greening of the roads used for the

project shall also be incorporated.


Chapter-10.

x.

Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at

plant site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater

from the roof tops and storm water drains to

recharge the ground water and also to use for the

various activities at the project site to conserve fresh

water and reduce the water requirement from other

sources.


Chapter-10.

xi.

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for

environmental pollution control measures shall be

included.


Chapter-2.


Chapter-10.

xii. Action plan for post-project environmental

monitoring shall be submitted.


Chapter-6.

xiii.

Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made)

Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan

including Risk Assessment and damage control.

Disaster management plan should be linked with

District Disaster Management Plan.


Chapter-7.

8. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

i. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational

health & safety of all contract and casual workers

For plan refer section 6.2 on page no. 6-1

of Chapter-6 and section 10.2 on page no.

10-10 of Chapter-10 and for fund allocation

refer section 2.5.1 on page no. 2-8 of

Chapter-2.

ii.

Details of exposure specific health status evaluation

of worker. If the workers’ health is being evaluated

by pre-designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry,

Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision,


Chapter-6 and section 7.2.8 on page no.

7-34 of Chapter-7.

en-vιsι�n



colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG,

during pre placement and periodical examinations

give the details of the same. Details regarding last

month analyzed data of above mentioned parameters

as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department

wise.

iii.

Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards.

What are the exposure levels of hazards and whether

they are within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). If

these are not within PEL, what measures the

company has adopted to keep them within PEL so

that health of the workers can be preserved,

Refer section 10.2 on page no. 10-10

section 10.5 on page no. 10-12 and section

10.1.1.1 on page no. 10-2 of Chapter-10.

iv. Annual report of heath status of workers with

special reference to Occupational Health and Safety.


Chapter-10.

9. CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT POLICY

i.

Does the company have a well laid down

Environment Policy approved by its Board of

Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA

report.


Chapter-10.

ii.

Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard

operating process / procedures to bring into focus

any infringement / deviation / violation of the

environmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it

may be detailed in the EIA.

Refer section 10.4.2 & 10.4.3 on page no.

10-11 of Chapter-10.

iii.

What is the hierarchical system or Administrative

order of the company to deal with the environmental

issues and for ensuring compliance with the

environmental clearance conditions? Details of this

system may be given.


Chapter-10.

iv.

Does the company have system of reporting of non

compliances / violations of environmental norms to

the Board of Directors of the company and / or

shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting

mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report


Chapter-10.

v.

Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as

sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the

labour force during construction as well as to the

casual workers including truck drivers during

operation phase.


Chapter-2.

vi.

Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

1. Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the project

cost) shall be earmarked towards the Enterprise

Social Commitment based on Public Hearing issues

and item-wise details along with time bound action

plan shall be included. Socio-economic

development activities need to be elaborated upon.


Chapter-8.

vii.

Any litigation pending against the project and/or

any direction/order passed by any Court of Law

against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be

included. Has the unit received any notice under the

Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or

relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so,

details thereof and compliance/ATR to the notice(s)

and present status of the case.

Not Applicable.

en-vιsι�n



viii. A tabular chart with index for point wise

compliance of above TORs.

Refer TOR and its Compliance of EIA/MEP

Report on page no. T-1.

ix. The TORs prescribed shall be valid for a period of

three years for submission of the EIA-EMP reports. Noted

en-vιsι�n

M/S. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES, GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT 1-1

CHAPTER – 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

The purpose of the EIA study is identifying existing environmental condition, predicting environmental

impacts associated with the proposed expansion project and suggesting measures to mitigate the adverse

impacts and to delineate a comprehensive environment management plan along with recommendations and

suggestions. The different activities that are likely to take place have been identified and mitigation measure

has been proposed.

The overall objective of any EIA study is to identify and assess the adverse impacts of a project in the

planning stage itself, so that necessary mitigation measures to prevent or minimize these adverse impacts

can be planned early and cost-effectively. In view of this, the specific objectives of this EIA are,

• To have an in-depth know-how of the project and to identify the probable sources of pollution that

may arises from each stage of the process.

• To review the current environmental status of the study area within 10 Km radius of the project site

by collecting the baseline data on the environmental attributes including air, noise, water, land,

ecological, hydro-geological climate and socio-economic environments.

• To estimate the impacts of the project on the surrounding environment.

• To prepare a comprehensive Environmental Management Plan to ensure that the environmental

quality of the area would be preserved.

• To formulate a strategy for effective monitoring and identify any deviations in the environmental

quality after the project is operational, which would help in evolving measures to counter these.

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT

Identification of Project The Environmental Impact Assessment study is carried out as a part of the process to obtain Environment

Clearance for the proposed expansion of pharmaceutical manufacturing unit of M/s. Orbit Pharma

Laboratories falls under Category A, of schedule 5(f), Synthetic Organic Chemicals Industry (Outside

Notified Industrial Area) as per EIA Notification dated 14th September, 2006 & its subsequent amendments.

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study was carried out during 01st October to 31st December, 2016

and accordingly EIA report has been prepared.

Project Proponents & their background

Mr. Kunal Kikani-CEO of the company (B.E. Chemical) 07 years of experience business and Mr. N. P.

Kikani (M.Sc.) 36 years of experience in business.

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT The proposed expansion project is Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Unit. The project is for Synthetic Organic

Chemicals Industry as per EIA notification 2006. The primary purpose of the expansion is to manufacture

important & some lifesaving drugs. At present, the Company is manufacturing 03 products and intends to

produce 08 new products along with 02 Intermediate products within existing premises.

1.4 SCOPE OF THE STUDY The scope of the EIA study is identifying existing environmental condition as per TOR, including Baseline

Monitoring of Ambient Air, Ground and Surface Water Quality, Ambient Noise Level, Soil Quality,

Ecology and Biodiversity, Land Use pattern and Socio-Economic condition of the area. Predicting

environmental impacts associated with the proposed project and suggesting measures to mitigate the

adverse impacts and to delineate a comprehensive environment management plan along with

en-vιsι�n


recommendations and suggestions. The different activities that are likely to take place have been identified

and mitigation measure has been proposed.

1.5 STRUCTURE OF THE EIA REPORT

Draft EIA and EMP Report has been prepared in line with Terms of Reference (TOR) suggested by

Environmental Appraisal Committee (Industry-II) vide MoEF&CC letter No. F. No. J-11011/115/2016-

IA II (I) dated, 2nd August, 2016 attached as annexure-I.

The objective of the EIA study is a preparation of Draft Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) and

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) report based on the guidelines of the Ministry of Environment and

Forests (MoEF) and Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB). It incorporates the following.

• Chapter 1 is an Introduction to the Industry, purpose of the report, information of project proponent

and regulatory frame work.

• Chapter 2 presents a Description of Project and Infrastructure facilities including industrial and

environmental aspects of M/s. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES during operation phase

activities as well as manufacturing process details of proposed product. This chapter also gives

information about project location, raw material storage and handling, water and wastewater

quantitative and qualitative details, treatment of industrial and domestic effluent, details of air

pollution and its control system, type and quantity of hazardous waste generation and its

management, details of utilities etc.

• Chapter 3 covers Baseline Environmental Status including meteorological details, Identification of

baseline status of Environmental components of the surrounding area covering air, water, noise and

land environment, study of land use pattern, ecological and socio-economic environment giving

details about the study area.

• Chapter 4 deals with Identification and Prediction of Impact, which provides quantification of

significant impacts of the proposed project activities on various environmental components.

Evaluation of the proposed pollution control facilities has been presented.

• Chapter 5 describes the analysis of alternate technology and site.

• Chapter 6 describes Environment Monitoring Plan to be adopted.

• Chapter 7 gives the information of Public Hearing and additional studies like Risk Analysis and

Disaster Management Plan that is adopted by the company.

• Chapter 8 gives the Benefits of the projects.

• Chapter 9 gives Environment cost benefit analysis.

• Chapter 10 describes Environment Management Plan (EMP) to be adopted for mitigation of

anticipated adverse impacts if any and to ensure acceptable impacts.

• Chapter 11 gives the Summary and conclusion of the project.

• Chapter 12 gives the Information of the Consultant.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 2

PROJECT DISCRIPTION

2.1 BRIEF PROJECT DISCRIPTION M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories was established in the year 1991 as a manufacturer and supplier of Speciality Pharmaceutical products. Manufacturing unit of the company is located at Block no. 155/1, 159, Chhatral-Kadi Road, Village Dhanot, Taluka Kalol, District Gandhinagar-382729. Orbit is managed by experienced and enthusiastic team.

2.2 TYPE OF PROJECT

M/s. Orbit laboratories is planning to expand pharmaceutical unit at Block No. 155/1, 159, Chhatral-Kadi Road, Village Dhanot, Taluka Kalol, District Gandhinagar – 382 729, Gujarat. Location of project is not within notified industrial area. Thus, the project falls under Category- A of schedule 5(f), synthetic organic chemicals industry as per the EIA Notification, September 2006 and & its subsequent amendments. Total existing production capacity is 3.25 MT/Month. After proposed expansion, production capacity will be 138 MT/Month. Existing pharmaceutical manufacturing unit is having CCA valid up to 08/01/2022.

2.3 NEED OF PROJECT The market of Pharmaceutical Drugs has fast progressing growth and there is ample opportunity in indigenous as well as export market. With the ever increasing world market demand for Pharmaceutical Drugs, the management having expertise in the same field and has decided to enhance its manufacturing capacity. The project is proposed with all required infrastructural facilities.

2.4 LOCATION The proposed expansion project is going to be established in existing premises. The area is having all infrastructure facilities for ease of the smooth project functioning. Project site is near to Kalol taluka of Gandhinagar district. Proposed expansion project of Pharmaceutical Drugs manufacturing unit at Block no. 155/1, 159, Chhatral-Kadi Road, Village Dhanot, Taluka Kalol, District Gandhinagar. The project site is located adjacent to the Kadi-Chhatral highway in south direction and State Highway-41 is around 2.8 km away from the project site in east direction. National Highway-8 is around 33 km in east direction from the site. Kadi Railway station is around 9 km from the project site in west direction. Ahmedabad Airport is around 32 km in south-east direction. Nearest village habitation is around 0.8 km in south-east direction. Kadi GIDC to Chhatral is industrial corridor, many industries is developed. Figure-2.1 is showing project site in India. Figure-2.2 is showing project site in google image with surroundings. Further, figure-2.3 and figure-2.4 shows photographs of the site and layout plan of the project respectively.

List of nearby Industries are as follows:

• Inter Chem. Corporation

• Akshar Dyes

• Subham Industries

• Suzuki Synthetics

• Khushboo Plywoods Pvt. Ltd.

• Sun Mark Stainless Pvt. Ltd.

• Kayel Syntex Ltd

• Arbuda Plastochem Pvt. Ltd.

• Ajay Organics and Chemicals Pvt. Ltd.

• Jawahar Plywoods Pvt. Ltd.

• G. R. Alloys Pvt. Ltd.

• Bhole Intermediates

• Virat Alloys Pvt. Ltd.

• G-One Agro Products Ltd.

en-vιsι�n


• Akash Agro Industries Ltd.

• Karan Paper mill and Radhe Packaging

• Many more industries in Chhatral GIDC.

Details of the project location

a) Village : Dhanot

b) Taluka : Kalol

c) District : Gandhinagar

d) State : Gujarat

e) Latitude : 23°16'52.50"N

f) Longitude : 72°24'47.72"E

Sr. No. Particular Latitude Longitude

1 North-East Corner 23°16'55.99"N 72°24'48.89"E 2 South-East Corner 23°16'50.08"N 72°24'49.23"E 3 North-West Corner 23°16'54.97"N 72°24'47.08"E 4 South-West Corner 23°16'50.24"N 72°24'47.39"E

FIGURE-2.1 DETAILED MAP OF GANDHINAGAR DISTRICT SHOWING PROJECT

LOCATION

Source: Maps of India

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-2.2 GOOGLE IMAGE OF THE PROJECT SITE

Source: Google earth

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-2.3 PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE PROJECT SITE

Entry Gate Factory Building

Greenbelt Storage shad

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-2.4 LAYOUT OF THE PLANT

en-vιsι�n


2.4.1 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS Details like name, distance and direction of key infrastructure features and settlement from the project site is given in following table-2.1. As per toposheet of Survey of India (SOI) and available data, there is no defense installation, severely or critically polluted area, national park/wildlife sanctuary, ecologically sensitive area within 10 km radius of the project site. A topographical map obtained from SOI showing National Highway, State Highways, other roads with the railway lines, water bodies, etc is presented in figure-2.5. Topography of the area is plane. TABLE-2.1 DISTANCE OF NEAREST KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES FROM SITE

No. Nearest Infrastructure Feature Distance from Project Site

1. Nearest Village Dhanot around 2.2 km in North-East direction

2. Nearest City Chhatral City is around 2.8 km in East direction

3. Nearest National Highway NH-8C around 20 km in south East direction

4. Nearest State Highway SH-41 2.40 km in East direction

5. Nearest Railway Station Kalol Railway station 10 km in South-East direction

6. River Shabarmati river 27 km East direction

7. Nearest Airport Ahmedabad International Airport around 32 km in South- West direction

8. Nearest Sea Gulf of Khambhat 138 km in South direction

9. Nearest TSDF site Naroda TSDF site, Ahmedabad around 35 km in south-south-

east direction,

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-2.5 KEY INFRASTRUCTURE FEATURES AND SETTLEMENTS

en-vιsι�n


2.5 MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION This proposed expansion project takes place from 3.25 MT/Month to total 138 MT/Month of production capacity. The process for manufacturing of the API & bulk drugs has been developed by in-house R & D. The primary purpose of the expansion is to manufacture important & life saving bulk drugs. Company is having 3 existing products and proposes new 08 products in expansion project. Addition of new products will be carried out in the existing land. Minor construction activity and some new plant machineries are required to manufacture additional products. The total project cost for the proposed expansion project would be around Rs. 5.45 Crores, so it is categorized as “Medium Scale Project” under Industrial Entrepreneurs’ Memorandum (IEM) scheme.

2.5.1 PROJECT COST The total cost of the proposed expansion project would be around Rs. 5.45 Crores. Total capital cost of pollution control measures will be Rs. 73.25 Lacs & recurring cost per annum will be 10 Lacs. The break-up of the project cost is shown in table-2.2 and table-2.3.

TABLE-2.2 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT

No. Description Cost (Rs. In Crore)

1 Land -

2 Site development 0.15

3 Building 0.82

4 Plant & Machinery 2.0

5 Environmental protection measures 0.73

6 Preoperative expense 0.34

7 Unpredictable expense 0.05

8 Working capital margin 1.36

TOTAL 5.45

TABLE-2.3 BREAK UP FOR THE PROPOSED INVESTMENT FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURE (EPCM)

No. Particulars Capital Cost

(Rs. In Lacs.)

Recurring Cost

(Rs. In Lacs. Per Annum)

1. Air & Noise Pollution Control 10 0.8

2. Water Pollution Control 55 6.8

3. Environment Monitoring & Management 1.25 1.6

4. Occupational Health 1.5 0.3

5. Green Belt 2.8 0.5

TOTAL 73.25 10

2.6 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND IMPLEMENTATION

Implementation of project within a pre-determined time frame is an important factor for the success of a project. Timely implementation may save on various costs like interest, administrative overheads and helps to realize the goals as per pre-determined objectives. The implementation of the project will involve major activities like preparation of specification / drawings, issue of tenders, receipt of quotations, scrutiny of tenders, placing of orders, civil & structural construction, delivery & erection of equipment, test trial runs of various items of equipment and commissioning of the plant & equipment and completion of the project will take place after getting the necessary clearances from concerned authority, and the funding for the project has been tied up. A tentative schedule indicating the commencement, duration and completion of various activities, is presented as table-2.4.

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-2.4 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

No. Particulars Expected date of

Commencement Expected date of

Completion 1. Land Already acquired

2. Land Development (After Necessary

clearance) 2 months from EC 3 months from EC

3. Civil Works 3 months from EC 15 months from EC

Plant & Machinery & Other Fixed Assets

4. Placement of orders 3 months from EC 12 months from EC

5. Equipment Delivery 12 months from EC 24 months from EC

6. Erection & installation 20 months from EC 27 months from EC

7. Trial Production 28 months from EC 30 months from EC

8. Start of Commercial Production 30 months from EC

2.7 TECHNICAL AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.7.1 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

The proposed project site is having existing Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient (API) & Bulk Drug Manufacturing Unit. Construction activities will be only for the expansion purpose. The project site is located outside the industrial area. This aspect shall be duly considered and taken care into during the detailed engineering phase while designing the structures. Construction materials, like steel, cement, crushed stones, sand, rubble, etc. are required for the Expansion and the same shall be procured from the local market.

2.7.2 PRODUCTION ACTIVITIES

List of existing and proposed products with their capacity is given in following table-2.5. The Company obtained NOC from SPCB before publication of EC notification 2006. NOC is given in Annexure-XII. TABLE-2.5 CAPACITY OF PRODUCTS

No. Name of Products Quantity (MT/Month)

Existing Proposed Total

1. Diclofenac Sodium IP/BP 2.5 22.5 25.0

A. 2:6 Dichloro DIphenyl N-Acetyl Chloride 0 50 50

B. 1-(2;6-Dichloro–Phenyl)–1; 3–Dihydro– Indole–2–one 0 25 25

2. Diclofenac Potassium 0.5 4.5 5.0

3. Diclofenac Diethyl Amine 0.25 2.25 2.5

4. Chlorzoxazone 0.0 3.0 3.0

5. Fenbendazole 0.0 10.0 10.0

6. Oxfendazole 0.0 5.0 5.0

7. Triclobendazole 0.0 2.5 2.5

8. Febantel 0.0 2.0 2.0

9. Closantel Base /Sodium 0.0 5.0 5.0

10. Gabapentine 0.0 1.0 1.0

11. Ondensetronticl Dehydrate 0.0 2.0 2.0

Total 3.25 134.75 138

By Products

1 Hydrochloric Acid 0 100 100

2 Aluminum Chloride Solution 0 70 70

3 Dil. Acetic Acid 0 48 48

en-vιsι�n


4 Liquor Ammonia 0 6 6

2.7.3 RAW MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS

Details of raw materials are given in following table-2.6. All major raw materials will be arranged through local vendors. Raw material for the unit will be procured from the different sources and it will be stored in separate chemical storage area.

TABLE-2.6 DETAILS OF RAW MATERIALS

No. Name of Raw Material MT/Month

1. 2,6-Dichlorophenol 69.81

2. Potassium Carbonate 31.30

3. Toluene 184.79

4. Methyl Mono Chloro Acetate (MMCA) 48.86

5. Aniline Oil 38.39

6. Chloro Acetyl Chloride (CAC) 62.83

7. Aluminum Chloride 43.18

8. Carbon 2.68

9. Acetic acid 19.82

10. Diethyle Amine 0.72

11. Hydrochloric Acid 15.13

12. 4 Chloro-2 Aminophenol 2.73

13. Urea TG 3.28

14. Hydro Sulphide of Soda 0.03

15. Caustic Lye 23.90

16. Methanol 229.34

17. 4-Chloro-2- Nitro Aniline 12.20

18. Thiophenol 7.32

19. Ferric Chloride 0.37

20. Hydrazine Hydride 9.76

21. Hydrogen Cyanide 7.32

22. Methyl Chloro Formate 8.54

23. Dimethyl Sulxoxide 0.55

24. Hydrogen Peroxide 1.60

25. Acetone 30.94

26. N(4-5) Dicloro-2 Nitro Phenyl Acetamide 2.38

27. Dimethyl Formamide (DMF) 2.38

28. 2:3 Dichloro Phenol 2.38

29. Nitrogen Gas 0.12

30. Hydrogen Gas 0.15

31. Raneynickel 0.26

32. Hyflow 0.10

33. Potassium Hydroxide 1.79

34. Calcium Disulphide 0.86

35. Dimethyl Sulfate 1.98

36. Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) 0.24

37. Methoxy Acetyl Chloride 0.59

38. Methylene Dichloride 16.37

39. Xylene 6.22

40. Thiourea 0.59

41. 1-Decylbromide 1.19

42. Methychloro Formate 1.33

43. 1-1 Cyclohexane Diacetic Acid 1.80

44. Liq. Bromine 1.17

45. Caustic Soda Flakes 11.78

en-vιsι�n



46. Trietylamine 0.50

47. 1,3 Cyclohexadione 0.95

48. Phenyl Hydrazine 1.01

49. Zinc Chloride 0.95

50. Phosphorous Trichloride 1.52

51. Closantel Amine 3.03

52. 3:5 DiIodosalicylic acid 4.24

53. Sodium Metal 3.18

54. Caustic Potash 1.52

55. Catalyst 0.23

56. Para Formaldehyde 1.14

57. 2-Methylimidazole 0.65

58. Liq. Ammonia 0.79

Scheme of mode of transportation: The raw materials will be purchased from the local market and transported through trucks to the project site. Approximately 60 numbers of trucks per month will be required for transportation of raw material, finished goods and hazardous wastes, etc.

2.7.4 MANUFACTURING PROCESS Manufacturing process of the products is given below; major equipments for the project are Fractional Distillation Unit, Stainless steel Reactors, Centrifuge, Dryer, etc.

1. DICLOFENAC SODIUM IP/BP

Manufacturing process:

Stage – I

In SS reactor charge Toluene + 2,6 Dichloro Phenol + Potassium Carbonate & reflux for 12hrs & cool to room temperature & add Methyl Mono Chloro Acetate reflux for 5hrs & recover toluene. Ether is reacts with aniline in present of sodium Methoxide forms DichloroDIphenyl Aniline & Methanol to be recovered.

Stage – II

In a glass line reactor Dichloro diethyl amine previously drayed reacts with Chloro acetyl chloride toluene as a solvent forms N-Chloro acetyl 2:6 DichloroDIphenyl amine i.e. one of intermediates to be sale. The HCl gas generated to be scrub in water give Hydrochloric acid i.e. by product.

Stage – III

In a glass line reactor N-Chloroderi. Is reacts with Alluminium Chloride at boiling temperature the HCL gas is generated & scrub in water gives Hydrochloric Acid i.e. by product. After completion of reaction the mass is dumped in 2 times water then neutch filter it. The ML is alluminium chloride solution it recycle for three times i.e. by product. The product is Indolenone Intermediate & to be sales it.

Stage-IV

In a ss reactor in water Indolenone hydrolyzed by caustic solution & gives Crude Diclofenac Sodium filter it. The ML is waste water received.

Stage-V

Final Diclofenac Sodium Crude Diclofenac Sodium is dissolved in DM water, Carbon & charged reflux & filter, cool & centrifuge it. The ML is recycled in stage-IV. The products dry at 80˙c to 85˙c i.e. Diclofenac Sodium.

en-vιsι�n


Chemical Reaction

Flow Diagram

en-vιsι�n


2. DICLOFENAC POTASSIUM

Manufacturing Process:

Stage – I

In ss reactor charge Toluene + 2,6 Dichloro Phenol + Potassium Carbonate & reflux for 12hrs & cool to room temperature & add Methyl Mono Chloro Acetate reflux for 5hrs & recover toluene. Ether is reacts with aniline in present of sodium Methoxide forms Dichloro DIphenyl Aniline & Methanol to be recovered.

Stage – II

In a glass line reactor Dichloro diethyl amine previously drayed reacts with Chloro acetyl chloride toluene as a solvent forms N-Chloro acetyl 2:6 Dichloro DIphenyl amine i.e. one of intermediates to be sale. The HCl gas generated to be scrub in water give Hydrochloric acid i.e. by product.

Stage – III

In a glass line reactor N-Chloro deri. is reacts with Alluminium Chloride at boiling temperature the HCl gas is generated & scrub in water gives Hydrochloric Acid i.e. by product. After completion of reaction the mass is dumped in 1.5 times water then neutch filter it. The ML is alluminium chloride solution it recycles for three times i.e. by product. The product is Indolenone Intermediate & to be sales it.

Stage-IV

In a ss reactor in water Indolenone hydrolyzed by Potassium Hydroxide solution & gives Crude Diclofenac Potassium filter it. The ML is west water received.

Stage-V

Final Diclofenac Potassium, Crude Diclofenac Potassium is dissolved in DM water, charge carbon & reflux & filter, cool & centrifuge it. The ML is recycled in stage-IV. The products dry at 80˙c to 85˙c i.e. Diclofenac Potassium.

Chemical Reaction

en-vιsι�n


Flow Diagram

3. DICLOFENAC DIETHYL AMINE

Manufacturing Process: Stage-I: In a SS reactor charge water + Diclofenac sodium stirr for half an hour slowly, then add acetic acid & after completion of addition stir for an hour, which will produce Diclofenac Free Acid. Filter it & dry it. The ML is west water neutral. Stage-II: In SS reactor charge water and Diclofenac acid stirr well slowly add diethyl amine stirr for two hours. Cool to room temperature. Filter through centrifuge ML is neutral water. Dry the product i.e. Diclofenac Diethyl Amine dry.

Chemical Reaction:

en-vιsι�n


Flow Diagram:

en-vιsι�n


4. CHLORZOXAZONE Manufacturing Process: Stage-I: In a glass line reactor charge hydrochloric acid and 4-cap heat to reflux maintain for 4 hours. Ammonia gas generation to be scrub in water. Then charge catalyst reflux for one hour. Cool to 100˙c charge water stirr for half an hour filter & ML west water. Collect cake i.e. crude chlorzoxazone. Stage-II: In SS reactor charge methanol & crude reflux for one hour. Filter in next ss reactor adjust ph-6. Stirr for one hour & recheck it. Centrifuge it ML is west water for ETP. Collect cake of semi final product. Stage-III Purification: In ss reactor charge methanol + semi final cake & charcoal. Heat to reflux for two hrs. Filter is at 80˙c collect ML in ss reactor cool it to room temperature centrifuge it. Collect methanol dry the cake. Pulverize & pack it i.e. CHLORZOXAZONE USP. Chemical Reaction:

Flow Diagram:

en-vιsι�n


5. FENBENDAZOLE Manufacturing Process:

Stage – I (A) In a ss reactor charge Methanol & 5Chlorophenylthio- 2 -Nitro Aniline heat to reflux i.e.65˙C to 70˙C. cool to room temperature filter it. Collect crude Methanol & recover methanol from M.L. residue. The product it Nitro Thiophenyl Aniline charge Toluene & Nitrothiophenyl aniline heat to 70˙ - 80˙C start addition of Hydrazine Hydrate after completion of Hydrazine Hydrate check reduction completion test if ok cool to room temperature wash with water collect upper organic layer convert it in Hydro Chloride by adding con. HCl & water.

Stage – II (B) In glass line reactor charge water & hydrogen cynamide heat it to 50˙C. Then start addition of Methyl Chloro Formate & Caustic Flakes. After completion of addition check pH neutral. Stirr for one hour. The product is Methyl Carbono hydrogen cynamide. (B)

Stage – III Coupling (A) + (B) In a glass line reactor charge Acetone + Stage I(A) & Stage II(B) couple the both stages at room temperature stir for 5 hours below room temperature filter it. Collect cake i.e. crude Fenbendazole west water and product. Charge wet cake in SS reactor + methanol 2 times heat to reflux for one hour. Cool it filter it. Collect methanol & distilled out. Final product is FENBENDAZOLE.

Chemical Reaction:

en-vιsι�n


Flow Diagram:

en-vιsι�n


6. OXFENDAZOLE Manufacturing Process: In a dry clean glass line reactor charge acetic acid, Dimethyl Sulfoxide & Fenbendazole cool to 5˙C & add hydrogen peroxide slowly maintain 3 hours. Check TLC for reaction completion. Neutralize the mass with sodium hydroxide solution filter it & wash with acetone. Collect the cake & dry it i.e. OXFENDAZOLE dry.

Chemical Reaction:

Flow Diagram:

en-vιsι�n


7. TRICLOBENDAZOLE Manufacturing Process:

Stage-I In glass line reactor charge DMF and Dinitro phenoxy Acetamide & stirr for a hour. Charge Dichloro Phenol & Potassium Carbonate. Reflux for 8 hours. Check TLC for completion of reaction. Then charge Methanol & slowly add caustic lye solution. Maintain temperature 70˙C to 75˙C for 4 hours. Check TLC for absence of Dichloro nitro phenoxy Acetamide of reaction completed add water. Stirr for half an hour. Filter & wash it by water & collect cake then dry it. Dry wet is intermediate.

Stage-II In a SS auto clave reactor charge methanol and stage-I and Raney Nickel pass first Nitrogen Gas & then hydrogen gas rise pressure & temperature 50˙C maintain for 4 hours. Check sample ok. Filter it. Charge ML in another reactor charge potassium hydroxide & carbon sulphide at low temperature. Raise the temperature & reflux for one hour. Check completion of reaction. Distilled out methanol & add water and dil. HCl to pH 6.5. Filter it wash with water dry it at 90-95˙C Product Quantity and ETP west water is received. Stage-III In glass line reactor charge TBZ Thiol + Methanol at room temperature add slowly DMS. Raise temperature 70˙C to 75˙C & maintain 2-3 hours check reaction completion cool it. Filter it for wet cake. Charge wet cake in glass line reactor + methanol + carbon. Heats to reflux for 2 hours cool to room temperature filter it wash with acetone. Dry it. Chemical Reaction:

Cl

Cl

NO2

NH

CH3

O

N-(4,5-dichloro-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide

Chemical Formula: C8H6Cl2N2O3

Molecular Weight: 249.1

NO2

NH

CH3

O

OH

Cl

Cl

2,3 dichloro phenol

Cl

O NO2

NH2

5-chloro-4-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)-2-nitroaniline

Chemical Formula: C12H7Cl3N2O3

Molecular Weight: 333.6

STAGE-IIA

CS LYE Sol'n

1) Ra-Ni

Cl

O NH2

NH2

Cl

Cl

Cl

O

N-(5-chloro-4-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide

Cl

Cl

Cl

Cl

4-chloro-5-(2,3-dichlorophenoxy)benzene-1,2-diamine STAGE-II

STAGE-I

en-vιsι�n


STAGE-III

STAGE-IV

STAGE-V

en-vιsι�n


Flow Diagram

en-vιsι�n


en-vιsι�n


8. FEBANTEL Manufacturing Process:

Stage-I In reactor charge 2-Nitro-5-(Phenylthio) aniline & Methelene dichloride. Stirr the reaction mass at 25 to 30˚c. Then start addition of Methoxy acetyl chloride during half an hour. Maintain for 8 hours. Check the completion of reaction. Then recover Methelene dichloride. Then add water. Stirr for 2 hours. Filter it. The wet cake i.e. 2-Methoxy-N-[2-Nitro-5(phenylthio) phenyl] Acetamide (Nitro FBT-Acetamide). Waste water is generate. Stage-II

In an autoclave reactor charge methanol + Nitro FBT-Acetamide wet. Make inert atmosphere by passing Nitrogen gas & charge raney nickel. Then start pressuring hydrogen gas. Heat the reaction mass up to 70°c-80˚c check the hydrogen pressure constant. Check TLC for completion of reaction. Cool to room temperature add water. Drain out the mass by washing methanol. Filter the catalyst. Heat the mother liquor & recover methanol. Cool to 10°C. Filter it & give water wash. Give the suspension wash by Xylene. Then again filter it. Wet cake. Recover Xylene from M.L. Dry the wet cake. Dry wt i.e. N-[2-Amino-5-(phenylthio) phenyl]-2-MethoxyAcetamide (Amino FBT-Acetamide).

Stage-III In a dry & clean glass line vessel add methanol + Thiourea +1decyl bromide. Heat to reflux. Check for reaction completion by TLC. Distilled out methanol cool to room temperature add MDC + Potassium Carbonate soln + Methyl Chloro Formate slowly as the exothermic reaction maintain for 5hrs. Check for completion of reaction. Add water & separate layer. Bottom organic layer heats to reflux & recover MDC in residue add methanol & stirr for one hour & filter it. Collect ML for recovery of methanol. Wet cake. Dry it. Dry wt i.e. S-Decyl Bis Carbamate (1, 3 Bis (Methoxycaronyl)-2-decyl-2-thiopseudourea (Decyl thiopseudourea).

Stage-IV In a glass line reactor charge methanol + Amino FBT Acetamide + Decyl thiopseudourea & charge hydro Chloric acid. Stirr the reaction mass at room temperature check the reaction completion test by HPLC cool to 5˚C. Filter the solid mass unload the material. Recover methanol from M.L. & wet cake dump in methelene dichloride & add water & stirr the material at room temperature. Then allow to settle & separate aqueous layer & from organic layer distilled out methelene dichloride purified the product in methanol & filter it. Recover methanol from M.L. Collect wet cake & dry wt 135kgs. The product is FEBANTAL.

Chemical Reaction:

en-vιsι�n


en-vιsι�n


Flow Diagram

en-vιsι�n


en-vιsι�n


9. Closantel Base /Sodium Manufacturing Process:

Stage-I In a dry glass line charge toluene. Add 3:5 Dilodosalicylic acid + Closantel amine heat to reflux & then add slowly phosphorus Trichloride. Maintain for 8 hrs check the completion of reaction. Cool to room temperature. Filter it wash with toluene & followed by water. Collect cake & dry is Closantel Base.

Stage - II Charge Closantel Base in ss reactor add caustic solution. Heat to reflux & maintain for 2 hrs. Cool to room temperature check pH should be alkaline. Filter it wash with water. Collect cake & dry it. Chemical Reaction:

en-vιsι�n


Flow Diagram

10. Gabapentine Manufacturing Process:

Stage - 1

Take water and NaOH in reactor to got clear solution. And cool -5 to -10 ˚C and charge 1.1 Cyclohaxane di acitic acid monoamide. Cool -5 to -10 ˚C and charge bromine liquid in 1 hour then temp. raise 35 to 40 ˚C for 3 hours. Charge MDC at 15 ˚c stirrer for 30 min. than charge HCl bring reaction mass pH 2.0. Stirrer for 30 min. then filter the mass to take crude. Charge methanol and wet cake stirrer 30 min. and filter the reaction mass. Take the stage 1 (84).

Stage - 2

Take acetone + water in reactor charge stage - 1 then charge TEA and bring reaction mass PH 7.2 stirrer 30 min. then filter the reaction mass and take crude. Take acetone + water add crude stirrer for 1 hours cool 0 to 5 ˚C for hours filter the reaction mass take wet cake and dry at 70 ˚C finish gabapentine 60.

en-vιsι�n


Chemical Reaction:

NH2

O

O

OH

Br2/NaOH

HCL

NH2

O

OH

.HCL

[1-(2-amino-2-oxoethyl)cyclohexyl]acetic acid [1-(aminomethyl)cyclohexyl]acetic acid

NH2

O

OH

.HCL

[1-(aminomethyl)cyclohexyl]acetic acid

TEA

NH2

O

OH

[1-(aminomethyl)cyclohexyl]acetic acid

Flow Diagram

en-vιsι�n


11. Ondensetron HCl Dihydrate Manufacturing Process:

Stage - I

Take water charge 1, 3, Cyclohexadione in reactor charge phenyl hydrazine in 2 hours. Then temp. raise 40˚C maintain for 3 hours and cool at RT. than filter reaction mass. Wet cake dry. Finish stage I.

Stage - II

Charge acetic acid charge zinc chloride heat at 85˚C for 1 hour. Than charge stage I maintain 100˚C for 3 hours and cool at RT add water then filter the reaction mass. Take crud wet cake charge methanol stirrer for 1 hours cool & filter stage II dry.

Stage - III Take acetone in reactor charge stage II caustic flakes and stirrer 30 min. add DMS stirrer for 3 hours cool and filter and dry.

Stage - IV Take DM water in reactor charge stage III charge formaldehyde heat 100 - 105 ˚C maintain for 6 hours. Than cool RT & filter wet cake dry ETP waste.

Stage - V Take DM water in reactor add stage IV cool at 15˚C and add Cons. HCl then add limidazole heat at 100 - 105˚C for 24 hours and cool 5˚C neutralise with liquor Ammonia solution filter & wash with chilled water take wet cake charge methanol add charcoal heat and reflux hot filter mother liquor cool 5˚C and stirr 1 hours and filter wet cake & dry 65˚C methanol recover from mother liquor.

Stage - VI Take DM water charge stage - V add methanol add HCl stirr for 24 hours at RT then cool 5˚C filter wet cake. Methanol recover from M.L. Waste water. Dry it cake. The product is ONDANSETRON HCl

DIHYDRATE IP / BP

Stage: 1

O

O

+

NHNH2

NH

O

N

1,3-cyclohexadione phenylhyadrezine Stage-1

Stage: 2

NH

O

N

Stage-1

ZnCL2

Acetic acidNH

O

1,2,3,9-tetrahydro-4H-carbazol-4-one

Stage: 3

NH

O

1,2,3,9-tetrahydro-4H-carbazol-4-one

DMS

NaOHN

O

CH3

9-methyl-1,2,3,9-tetrahydro-4H-carbazol-4-one

en-vιsι�n


Stage: 4

N

O

CH3

9-methyl-1,2,3,9-tetrahydro-4H-carbazol-4-one

N

O

CH3

CH2

9-methyl-3-methylidene-1,2,3,9-tetrahydro-4H-carbazol-4-one

Paraformaldehyde

Stage: 5

N

O

CH3

CH2

9-methyl-3-methylidene-1,2,3,9-tetrahydro-4H-carbazol-4-one

N

NH

CH3

N

O

CH3

N

N

CH3

Ondansetron Base

Stage: 6

N

O

CH3

N

N

CH3

Ondansetron Base

N

O

CH3

N

N

CH3

HCL

.HCL .2H2O

Ondansetron HCL dihydrate

en-vιsι�n


Flow Diagram

en-vιsι�n


en-vιsι�n


2.7.5 SOLVENT MANAGEMENT Solvents will be used for manufacturing of proposed products like Toluene, Methanol, Acetone, etc. All the spent solvent generated from the manufacturing process will be recovered and reused in the premises for the manufacturing of products. Solvent will be distilled in solvent distillation column having capacity of 10 kl. Solvent details are given in following table.

TABLE-2.7 SOLVENT DETAILS

Solvents Requirements Generation Recovered Residue

MTPM

Toluene 173.32 162.92 159.45 8.15

Aniline oil 38.39 36.09 35.32 1.80

Methanol Washing 35.21 33.10 32.39 1.65

Methanol 161.63 151.93 148.70 7.60

Acetone 24.44 22.97 22.48 1.15

2.8 COMPONENTS OF PROJECT

2.8.1 LAND Company is having 7066 sq. m. of private land area. No new land is required for the proposed expansion project. Detailed land use breakup of the plot area is given in following table-2.8 and plant layout shown in figure-2.4. Land documents are enclosed as annexure-II. TABLE-2.8 DETAILED LAND USE BREAKUP

No. Land Use Break Up Total Area

(sq. mt.)

1 Office and Factory shed 1177.07

2 Utility area 205.9

3 Storage area 112.20

4 ETP area 81.41

5 Waste storage area 94.65

6 Parking area 100

7 Greenbelt (33%) 2332

8 Open area 1762.77

9 Internal road area 1200

Total 7066

2.8.2 POWER REQUIREMENT Total power requirement will be 260 KW (60 KW existing and 200 KW proposed) will be sourced from UGVCL (Uttar Gujarat Vij Company Limited). During emergency purpose one D. G. Set of 100 KVA and additional one number of D. G. Set of 250 KVA will be utilized.

2.8.3 FUEL REQUIREMENTS

TABLE-2.9 FUEL REQUIREMENTS

No. Fuel Existing Proposed Total Remark

1 Wood Waste/ Agro

waste/ Coal 300 Kg/Day 2,700 Kg/Day 3000 Kg/Day

For Boiler & Hot Air

Generator

2 Coal - 1,800 Kg/Day 1800 Kg/Day For Thermic Fluid Heater

3 Diesel 8 Lit/Day 20 Lit/Day 28 Lit/Day For DG Sets

Note: Wood waste or Agro waste will be used as a fuel in the existing and proposed boiler, however as proposed Coal shall be used only in case of non-availability of wood waste or Agro waste.

en-vιsι�n


2.8.4 MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS For proposed expansion project total 100 (existing 19 and additional 81) personnel will be required. Out of total 30 personnel will be on contract basis. Preference will be given to local people on the ground of qualification. Local people will be hired for construction work so labor colony will not be required. Existing facility will be utilized for their requirements. During operation phase rest rooms and sanitation facilities will be provided for truck drivers if required.

2.8.5 WATER SOURCE, UTILIZATION AND WASTE WATER Total water requirement will be 60 KLD. Out of 60 KLD, 6 KLD will be used only for greenbelt development & 5 KLD for domestic purpose. 49 KLD water will be required for industrial purpose (boiler, cooling tower, for process, washing & others). Area available within premises and rain fall of the region, entire water requirement cannot be met from water management/collection and rain water harvesting. Considering this fact and non-availability of any other water sources in nearby area, entire water requirement for the proposed project will be met from ground water using bore well. Application for obtaining permission from the Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA) is already submitted, acknowledgment copy is given in annexure-XV. TABLE-2.10 DETAILS OF WATER CONSUMPTION

No. Purpose Water Consumption (KLD)


(A) Domestic 0.95 4.05 5.0

Industrial (B)

1. Process 3 9.35 12.35

2. Cooling tower 2 5

(3 fresh + 2 reuse)

7

(5 fresh + 2 reuse)

3. Boiler 3 23

(20 fresh + 3 reuse) 26

(23 fresh + 3 reuse)

4. Washing 2 4 6

5. Others 0.15 2.5 2.65

(B) Total Industrial water 10.15 38.85

(38.85 fresh + 5 reuse) 54

(49 fresh + 5 reuse)

(C) Green Belt 3 3 6

Total 14.1

45.9 (45.9 fresh + 5 reuse)

65 (60 fresh + 5 reuse)

TABLE-2.11 DETAILS OF WASTE WATER GENERATION

No. Purpose Waste Water Generation (KLD)


(A) Domestic 0.65 3 3.65

Industrial (B)

1 Processing 2 15 17

2 Cooling Tower Blow down 0.1 0.5 0.6

3 Boiler Blow down 0.1 3 3.1

4 Washing 1.15 4 5.15

5 Others 0.1 1.7 1.8

(B) Total Industrial water 3.45 24.2 27.65

(C) Green Belt -- -- --

Total (A+B+C) 4.1 27.2 31.3

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-2.6 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM

2.8.6 AIR POLLUTION

Air pollution is classified into point source emission and fugitive emissions. There are two main sources of point source pollution: Flue gas through utility Steam Boiler, Hot Air Generator, Thermic Fluid Heater and D.G. set & process gas emission through stack attached to reaction vessels. Emissions from point sources may include Particulate Matter (PM), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) & Hydrogen Chloride (HCl). Details of air pollution sources are given in the following table-2.12.

TABLE-2.12 DETAILS OF STACKS

No. Stack Attached To Fuel Used Stack Height Pollution Control

System Final Concentration

EXISTING SCENARIO

1. Boiler * (1TPH) Wood Waste/ Agro waste / 300 kg/Day

30 meter Multi Cyclone SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3 SO2 ≤ 100 ppm NOX ≤ 50 ppm 2. Hot Air Generator 8 meter -

3. D.G Set (Stand By) 100 KVA

Diesel 8 Lit/Hr 03 meter Acoustic

Enclosures

SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3 SO2 ≤ 100 ppm NOX ≤ 50 ppm

PROPOSED SCENARIO

1. Boiler * (2TPH)

Coal/ Agro waste / 2700 kg/Day

30 meter Multi Cyclone SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3

SO2 ≤ 100 ppm NOX ≤ 50 ppm

2. Thermic Fluid Heater

(2 lac Kcal)

Coal

1800 kg/day 30 meter Multi Cyclone

SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3

SO2 ≤ 100 ppm NOX ≤ 50 ppm

3. D.G Set (Stand By) 250 KVA

Diesel 20 Lit/Hr

09 meter Acoustic

Enclosures

SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3 SO2 ≤ 100 ppm NOX ≤ 50 ppm

* There will be a common stack for existing and proposed boiler

PROCESS EMISSION

No. Stack Attached To Stack Height Pollution Control System Final Concentration

EXISTING SCENARIO

1. Reaction vessels 09

meter

Water scrubber followed by

Alkali Scrubber HCl ≤ 20 mg/Nm

3

Fresh water 60 KLD

Domestic 5 KLD

Domestic water

3.65 KLD

Process 12.35

KLD

Concentrate Stream

17 KLD

Soak pit/well

Boiler 26

(23+3) KLD

Boiler Blow

Down 3.1 KLD

Cooling 7

(5+2) KLD

Boiler Blow

Down 0.6 KLD

Washing

6 KLD

Waste water

5.15 KLD

Others

2.65 KLD

Boiler Blow

Down 1.8 KLD

Gardening

6 KLD

ETP

10.65 KLD Send to Common

evaporation

Single stage

evaporator

Dilute Stream

5 KLD

Condensate

en-vιsι�n


No. Stack Attached To Stack Height Pollution Control System Final Concentration

PROPOSED SCENARIO

1. Reaction vessels 09 meter Water scrubber followed by

Alkali Scrubber HCl ≤ 20 mg/Nm3

2.8.6.1 SOURCE OF FUGITIVE OR SECONDARY EMISSIONS The fugitive dust emissions from the proposed plant will be significant and the sources listed as under:

1. Loading unloading section 2. Material Handling Section and Transfer Points 3. Leak/ spill from storage vessels/ facilities 4. Leak from pumps, valves and pipes 5. Transportation of vehicles

2.8.7 NOISE POLLUTION The noise levels are primarily generated due to industrial activities like mechanical movement and material handling. Noise may result from loading unloading, motors, vehicular movement, generators, etc.

2.8.8 LAND/SOIL POLLUTION Details of solid/hazardous wastes generation are given in the following table-2.13. TABLE-2.13 DETAILS SOLID/HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION

No. Name of the Waste Catego

ry No.

Existing

(MT/M)

Proposed

(MT/M)

Quantity

(MT/M) Method of Storage and Disposal

1 ETP Sludge 35.3 2 13 15 Collection, storage and transport

to TSDF site.

2 Used Oil 5.1 0.025 MT/Y

0.025 MT/Y

0.05 MT/Y

Collection, storage and reuse as lubricants in the machineries within the premises only or send to authorized re-processors.

3 Discarded Containers/Barrels/ plastic

33.1 300

nos/year 300

nos/year 600

nos/year

Collection, storage and send to authorized recycler after decontamination.

4 Date Expired, discard and off specification medicines

28.4/ 28.5

What so ever to be generated

1.0 1.0 After giving proper treatment will be disposed at CHWF/TSDF

5 Fly Ash - - 18 18 Collection, storage and send to brick manufacturer or send to

TSDF site.

6 Solvent Residue 36.1 - 20.35 20.35 Collection, storage and sent for incineration

7 Evaporator salt - - 5 5 Collection, storage and transport to TSDF site.

2.9 ENVIRONMENNTAL MITIGATION MEASURES

2.9.1 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR WATER POLLUTION In existing scenario 4.1 KLD waste water is generating which includes 0.65 KLD domestic waste water and remaining 3.45 KLD is industrial effluent. Domestic waste water is disposed through septic tank/soak pit. While industrial effluent is treated in ETP and after treatment it is evaporated through single stage evaporator. After the proposed expansion, around 31.3 KLD waste water will be generated. Domestic waste water will be generated around 3.65 KLD and disposed through septic tank/soak pit. While industrial effluent around 27.65 KLD will be generated. Total effluent will be segregated into two streams i.e. concentrated stream and dilute stream. Dilute stream will be treated in proposed upgraded ETP and treated water will be

en-vιsι�n


evaporated through single stage evaporator. Thus, dilute stream will be for Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD). Concentrated stream effluent will be sent to common evaporation facility at Chhatral. For treating wastewater, Effluent Treatment Plant with details is given in following sections. Schematic flow diagram of existing & proposed ETP is shown in figure-2.9. Details of ETP units are given in table-2.13 and characteristic of treated and untreated effluent is given in table-2.12.

2.9.1.1 DETAILS OF EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (ETP) During the manufacturing of products, effluent is generated. From this effluent two streams are segregated, concentrated and dilute stream. Concentrated Stream:

Concentrated stream is collected separately and neutralized, if required and then it is transported through designated tankers for spray drying (Common Evaporation) facility. ETP unit details for concentrated stream are given below:

Unit Details of ETP for High COD

SR. NO. UNITS DIMENSION (M3) NOS MOC

01 Collection cum neutralization tank 2.5 m x 2.5 m x 2.5 m 2 Nos. RCC

02 Neutralization effluent holding tank 2.5 m x 2.5 m x 2.5 m 1 No. RCC

03 Filter press - 1 No -

Dilute Stream:

Dilute stream is/will be treated in existing ETP where effluent is first flow to equalization cum neutralization tank where it is homogenized and neutralized, if required. Homogenized and neutralized effluent is pumped at uniform rate to flocculating channel. Effluent at flocculating channel is mixed with lime solution and suitable coagulant solution and flock formation takes place flocked effluent then it flow to primary settling tank. Effluent is calm condition, hence settleable solids or flocks settle at bottom to form sludge and it is periodically removed and taken to sludge drying beds for sun drying. Top supernatant flows to aeration tank. The effluent is undergo aerobic biological degradation by conversion of organic matter in to micro-organisms or bio-sludge. Necessary oxygen for marinating aerobic condition is supplied with provision of surface aerator of suitable capacity. Effluent at equilibrium state of micro-organisms if flow to secondary settling tank. Effluent here is allow micro-organisms or bio-sludge to settle at bottom which is pumped and necessary quality of bio-sludge, for marinating desired level of micro-organism, recycled to aeration tank, where as excess sludge is bled to sludge drying beds for sun drying. Top supernatant is stored in treatment effluent sump.

Unit Details of ETP for Dilute Stream

SR. NO. UNITS DIMENSION (M3) NOS MOC

1. Oil & Grease Trap 2.10 x0 1.50 x 1.00 1 RCC

2. Collection Tank cum Neutralization Tank

2.50 x 2.00 x 2.00 1 RCC

3. Flocculation Channel 2.75 x 0.40 x 0.20 1 RCC

4. Primary settling Tank 2.75 x 2.75 x 1.80 1 RCC

5. Aeration Tank 6.50 x 6.50 x 2.75 1 RCC 6. Secondary settling Tank 3.50 x 3.50 x 1.80 1 RCC

7. Treated Effluent Sump 2.00 x 2.0 x 2.0 1 RCC 8. Sludge drying Bed 2.00 x 2.00 x 1.10 4 RCC

9. Single stage evaporator 5 KL 1 -

Proposed Scenario

10. Single stage evaporator/ Spray Dryer

5 KL 1 -

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-2.14 CHARACTERISTICS OF TREATED AND UNTREATED EFFLUENT

Dilute Stream No. Parameters Untreated Parameters (mg/l) Treated Parameters (mg/l)

1 pH 7 – 7.5 6.8 – 7.2

2 BOD 1,000 <30

3 COD 2,500 <100

4 TDS 3,500 <2,100

5 Oil and Grease 2 - 2.5 Nil (Treated in ETP with single stage evaporator)

Concentrated Stream No. Parameters Untreated Parameters (mg/l) Treated Parameters (mg/l)

1 pH 7 6.8 – 7.2

2 BOD 10,000 <30

3 COD 22,000 <100

4 TDS 25,000 <2,100

5 Oil and Grease 2.5 – 3 Nil (Sent for common Evaporation Facility)

FIGURE-2.7 SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM OF ETP

Existing ETP is more than sufficient to cater the additional effluent of 24.2 KLD to treat in existing ETP. In the proposed scenario, one additional 5 KL single stage evaporator will be added to treat Dilute stream effluent. And concentrated stream effluent will be sent to common Evaporation facility to achieve zero liquid discharge. 2.9.2 MITIGATION MEASRURES FOR AIR POLLUTION

Sufficient stack height & scrubbers at vent will be provided as APCM to control the air pollution. Details are given in table-2.10.

en-vιsι�n


2.9.2.1 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR FUGITIVE OR SECONDARY EMISSIONS The fugitive emissions of organic chemicals and VOCs mainly occur due to tank breathing losses, Leaking pipe fitting and valves, during maintenance operations. Though these are not expected to be significant, the following measures will be followed to ensure compliance and further reductions wherever possible.

• The fugitive emissions in terms of handling losses will get reduced by proper storage and handling.

• Hazardous chemicals will be stored as per standard criteria.

• Periodically monitoring will be carried out as per the post project monitoring plan.

• Proper ventilation in storage & production area shall be ensured and all materials must be stored in suitable packing to prevent contamination of air due to particulates & volatile emissions from storage container & area.

• Enclosed system & efficient procedures for materials charging shall be ensured.

• Procedures for start-up shut down, operation & maintenance procedures shall be established & maintained in all relevant area of works.

• The coverage of greenbelt around the plant also acts as natural barrier to stop carrying of dust along with the wind current.

• Good housekeeping will be maintained in the plant.

• Risk analysis will be done at every stage to identify potential risks and install appropriate elimination / mitigation systems

2.9.3 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR NOISE POLLUTION

During Construction Phase

Following measures are proposed during construction period to mitigate adverse impacts:

• Construction machinery and vehicles will undergo periodic maintenance to keep them in good working condition.

• All machineries to be used for construction purpose will be of highest standard of reputed make and compliance of noise pollution control norms by these equipments will be emphasized by the company.

• Feasibility of putting up acoustic enclosure / temporary barrier around areas with high noise levels will also be explored.

• All construction workers working in high noise areas will be provided appropriate PPEs like ear muffs and made to wear them during working hours.

• Possibility of raising green belt along with construction activity will also be explored so as to serve as a noise barrier.

During Operation Phase Following precautionary measures will be adopted to control the noise level:

• Noise generating sources and their platforms will be maintained properly to minimize noise vibrations generated by them

• Personnel working near the noisy machines in different plant locations, will be provided with well designed ear muffs / plugs (effective noise reduction 10-15 dBA)

• Green belt will be improved to act as a noise barrier.

• Noise barriers / shields in the form of walls, beams will be provided around the units wherever found feasible

• Training to personnel will be imparted to generate awareness about effects of noise and importance of using PPEs (Personal Protective Equipments).

2.9.4 MITIGATION MEASURES FOR LAND/SOIL POLLUTION ETP Sludge will be sent to nearest TSDF site for dumping. Used Oil will be reused as lubricants in the machineries within the premises only or sent to authorize re-processors. Discarded Containers/ Barrels/ plastic will be sent to authorize recycler after decontamination. Date Expired, discard and off specification medicines, after giving proper treatment will be disposed at CHWF/TSDF. Solvent residue will be sent for incineration. Fly Ash will be sent to brick manufacturer or sent to TSDF site. The membership of common hazardous waste treatment storage and disposal facility (TSDF) of Ecocare, Surendranagar and TSDF membership certificate is attached as Annexure-III. For further details, refer table-2.11.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 3

BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

3.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE STUDY AREA The baseline status of environmental quality in the vicinity of project site serves as the basis for

identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. The baseline environmental quality is assessed through

field studies within the impact zone for various components. Study area for the Environmental Impact

Assessment is within 10 km radius from the project site. Location map of the project site with study area is

given in figure-3.1. Baseline data generation of the following environmental attributes is essential in EIA

studies.

I. Meteorology

II. Ambient Air Quality

III. Ambient Noise Quality

IV. Surface and Ground Water Quality

V. Soil Quality & Geological Features

VI. Land use pattern

VII. Biological Information

VIII. Socio-economic status survey

3.2 PERIOD OF MONITORING The baseline environmental quality has been assessed during Post-Monsoon Season i.e 1

st October to 31

st

December, 2016 in a study area of 10 km radial distance from the project site.

3.3 COMPONENTS AND METHODOLOGY

In the process of Environmental Impact Assessment, baseline study is conducted for the environmental

components like; air, noise, water, soil quality, land use, ecology & biodiversity and socio-economic. For

the collection of baseline data of these components, primary and secondary data collection methodology is

followed. The study was finalized with the TORs approved by the Ministry of Environment, Forest &

Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi. Compliance of this TOR points are complied in a separate

section in this report.

Primary data has been collected through field monitoring for meteorological conditions, ambient air

quality, water quality, noise quality, soil quality, etc, which includes major portion of the baseline

environmental studies. In addition to these important studies, further studies like land use, socio-economic

studies, ecological and biodiversity studies, hydrogeology, etc. are covered during the study period.

Secondary information sources and constitutes is used for these studies and remaining parts of the baseline

environmental studies.

en-vιsι�n

M/S. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES, GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT 3- 2

FIGURE-3.1 LOCATION MAP OF THE PROJECT SITE WITH STUDY AREA

en-vιsι�n


3.4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

3.4.1 METEOROLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Climate of Study Area Gandhinagar has a tropical wet and dry climate with three main seasons: summer, monsoon and winter. The

climate is generally dry and hot outside of the monsoon season. The weather is hot to severely hot from

March to June when the maximum temperature. It is pleasant in the winter days and quite chilling in the

night during December to February. The southwest monsoon brings a humid climate from mid-June to mid-

September. The average annual rainfall is around 803.4 mm (31.63 in).

Meteorology Air borne pollutants is dispersed by atmospheric motion. Knowledge of these motions which range is scale

from turbulent diffusion to long-range transport by weather systems. It is essential to simulate such

dispersion and quality of impacts of air pollution on the environment. The purpose of EIA is to determine

whether average concentrations are likely to encounter at fixed locations (Know as the receptor), due to the

given sources (locations and rates of emission known), under idealized atmospheric conditions. It is

imperative that one should work with idealized condition and all analysis pertaining to air turbulence and

ambient air or noise pollution should be done with meteorological conditions, which can be best expected

to occur. The details of measurement technique, instruments, specification of measurement standards and

accuracy of instruments are adopted from the “Guidelines for micrometeorological technique in Air

Pollution Studies” Care is taken to install the anemometer within a distance of six times the height of

nearest vertical terrain elements (house, trees etc.) and height of 10 m from the average ground level of the

fetch area. Climatological Tables of Observatories in India 1981-2010” issued by “The Director General of

Meteorology, New Delhi” which is shown as annexure-IV for the station of Ahmedabad.

Temperature Details Temperature varies from season to season. Mean daily maximum temperature was recorded in the month of

May at 41.6°C. Highest mean temperature in the month, recorded in May, was 44.4°C. From November to

January, both day and night temperatures begin to decrease rapidly. January is generally the coldest month,

with mean morning temperatures of 7.9°C. Mean daily minimum temperature of about 12.4°C is recorded

in January. During the post-monsoon season, day temperatures remain between 21.4 – 35.7 ºC. In winters,

i.e. January to February, day temperatures remain between 12.4 – 30.8ºC.

Relative Humidity (RH) Most humid conditions are found in the monsoon season. Thereafter, it decreases gradually during post-

monsoon, winter and summer season in that order. Mornings are more humid than evenings and humidity

ranges from a high of 74 to 87% in monsoon mornings to a low of 20 to 25% in summer evenings. During

post-monsoon season, morning humidity remains between 57 to 65% and during the evening it remains

between 36 to 41%.

Rainfall Average annual rainfall for the Ahmedabad station was observed 750.9 mm. Allocation of rainfall by

season was 4.3 mm in winter (December, January, February), 10.0 mm in summer (March, April, May),

724.2 mm in monsoons (June, July, August, September) and 14.0 mm in post-monsoons (October to

November).

Predominant Wind Direction

Pre dominant wind direction is shown as following figure-3.2 A and figure-3.2 B.

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-3.2 A PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTIONS (0300 UTC)

October November December

FIGURE-3.2 B PREDOMINANT WIND DIRECTIONS (1200 UTC)

October November December

The annual variations in average wind speed recorded at 0300 and 1200 UTC at Ahmedabad during the

period of 1971-2000. As per India Meteorological Department (IMD), Atlas of wind roses, 1971-2000 the

predominant wind direction during the study period is observed to be from NE and E direction.

Site Specific Meteorological Environment

Meteorological station was installed at the project site to record micrometeorological parameters on hourly

basis during the study period (1st October to 31st December, 2016) to understand the wind pattern,

temperature variation, relative humidity variation, etc. Site-specific mean meteorological data is given in

following table-3.1 and the wind rose diagram processed by the Industrial Source Complex – Short Term

(ISCST3) software based on data collected at site is shown in figure-3.3.

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-3.1 SITE SPECIFIC METEOROLOGICAL DATA (1ST

OCT TO 31ST

DEC, 2016)

Meteorological Parameter Month of Year 2016

1st Month 2

nd Month 3

rd Month

Temperature (0C)

Min.

Max.

Avg.

23

39

29

18

36

26

13

34

23

Relative Humidity (%)

Min.

Max.

Avg.

16

83

36

15

94

43

13

94

46

Wind Speed (km/hr)

Min.

Max.

Avg.

00.00

06.00

01.50

00.00

05.00

01.40

00.00

05.80

01.00

Wind Direction NE

Rain Fall Nil

FIGURE-3.3 WIND ROSE DIAGRAM

en-vιsι�n


3.4.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT

Design of Network for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations The air quality status in the impact zone is assessed through a network of ambient air quality monitoring

locations. The tropical climatic conditions mainly control the transport and dispersion of air pollutant

during various seasons.

The baseline studies for air environment include identification of specific air pollutants prior to

implementation of the project. The EIA study requires monitoring of baseline air quality during one season.

Accordingly, air quality monitoring was carried out in during 1st October to 31

st December, 2016. The

baseline status of the air environment is assessed through a systematic air quality surveillance programme,

which is planned based on the following criteria:

• Topography / terrain of the study area

• Regional synoptic scale climatologically normal

• Densely populated areas within the region

• Location of surrounding industries

• Representation of regional background

• Representation of valid cross-sectional distribution in downwind direction

Reconnaissance

Reconnaissance was undertaken to establish the baseline status of air environment in the study region. Eight

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) locations were selected based on guidelines of network sitting

criteria. All AAQM locations were selected within the study area of 10 km radial distance from the project

site as per standard TOR.

Methodology for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out in accordance with guidelines of Central Pollution

Control Board (CPCB) of June 1998 and National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) of CPCB vide

G.S.R. No. 826(E) dated 18th November, 2009. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) was carried out

at eight locations during 16th March to 15th June, 2016 for parameters such as Particulate Matter (PM10 and

PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Carbon monoxide (CO), Hydrogen Chloride

(HCl), and Volatile Organic Compound (VOC). The monitoring was carried out 24 hours a day twice a

week per location in the study area. Twenty-four numbers of observations were taken at each monitoring

location. The locations of the different stations with respect to its distance and direction from project site

are shown in table-3.2 and figure-3.9 respectively. Raw data of AAQM enclosed as annexure-V.

The values for mentioned concentrations of various pollutants at all the monitoring locations were

processed for different statistical parameters like arithmetic mean, minimum concentration, and maximum

concentration and percentile values. The existing baseline levels of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO, HCl and

VOC are expressed in terms of various statistical parameters as given in tables-3.3. National Ambient Air

Quality Standards (NAAQS) are enclosed as an annexure-VI.

TABLE-3.2 DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS

No. Name of Village Bearing

W.R.T.

Approximate Radial

Distance (Km)

Type of

Area

1. Project site (A1) -- -- Industrial

2. Bileshvarpura (A2) NE 3.26 Residential

3. Irana (A3) NW 4.0 Residential

4. Budasan (A4) WNW 4.22 Residential

5. Rajpur (A5) N 5.3 Residential

6. Achrasan (A6) SWS 2.5 Residential

7. Lunasan (A7) SSE 3.0 Residential

8. Chhatral city (A8) E 3.4 Residential

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-3.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STATUS

No. Sampling

Location -

Parameters

Unit: µg/m3

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOX CO

mg/m3

HCl VOC

(as isobutyl)

1.

Project site

(A1)

Min. 67.12 30 11.17 19.27 0.1

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 76.7 37.05 16.69 25.71 0.3

Ave. 71.52 33.63 13.91 22.43 0.2

98th Per. 75.97 36.98 16.67 25.57 0.3

2.

Bileshvarpur

a (A2)

Min. 67.9 29.5 9.59 17.04 0.1

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 75.8 37.1 15.98 24.70 0.4

Ave. 71.85 32.77 13.25 20.61 0.2

98th Per. 75.43 37.08 15.94 24.58 0.4

3. Irana (A3)

Min. 63.6 28.8 7.89 16.93 0.1

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 70.5 37.89 14.56 21.49 0.3

Ave. 66.85 32.60 10.79 18.94 0.2

98th

Per. 70.32 36.95 14.27 21.34 0.3

4. Budasan

(A4)

Min. 68.5 21.1 10.02 14.9 0.1

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 76.01 37.5 16.19 19.1 0.4

Ave. 72.57 32.40 13.50 17.78 0.2

98th

Per. 76.01 36.78 16.18 19.10 0.4

5. Rajpur (A5)

Min. 61.9 27.01 5.00 17.04 0.1

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 70.2 34.7 12.93 22.58 0.2

Ave. 65.77 30.83 9.26 19.81 0.1

98th

Per. 70.11 34.47 12.92 22.58 0.2

6. Achrasan

(A6)

Min. 66 28.46 8.03 19.05 0.1

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 73.9 35.85 14.96 24.70 0.3

Ave. 70.23 31.69 11.42 21.73 0.2

98th

Per. 73.50 35.48 14.70 24.70 0.3

7. Lunasan

(A7)

Min. 59.5 26.90 8.07 14.11 0.1

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 66.2 33.01 12.94 21.87 0.2

Ave. 62.79 30.01 10.54 17.89 0.1

98th Per. 66.08 33.01 12.91 21.67 0.2

8. Chhatral city

(A8)

Min. 69.5 31.50 3.18 15.52 0.2

<1.0 <1.0 Max. 76.01 37.27 16.62 23.99 0.5

Ave. 72.86 34.25 9.42 20.00 0.3

98th

Per. 76.01 37.15 15.69 23.99 0.5

Results & Discussion

The baseline levels within the study area with respect to (PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO, HCl and VOC) terms

of various statistical parameters are presented in tables-3.3. During baseline monitoring, the arithmetic

mean values of PM10 varied between 62.79- 72.86 µg/m3 while the 98

th percentile values of PM10 ranged

between 66.08– 76.01µg/m3. The arithmetic mean values of PM2.5 varied between 30.01– 34.25 µg/m3 while

the 98th percentile values of PM2.5 ranged between 33.01- 37.15 µg/m3. The arithmetic mean value for SO2

was 9.26 – 13.91µg/m3 and the 98

th percentile of SO2 was 12.91- 17.21µg/m

3. The arithmetic mean values of

NOx varied between 17.78–22.43µg/m3 while the 98

th percentile of NOX ranged from 19.10- 25.57 µg/m

3.

The arithmetic mean values of CO varied between 0.1– 0.3 mg/m3

while the 98th percentile of CO ranged

from 0.2– 0.5mg/m3. The arithmetic mean and 98th percentile values of HCl and VOC are found below

detectable limit (BDL) <1.0 µg/m3.

en-vιsι�n


3.4.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Methodology for Water Quality Monitoring Physico-chemical parameters have been analyzed to ascertain the baseline status existing ground water and

surface water bodies. Samples were collected once during the study period. The details of ground water and

surface water sampling locations are given in table-3.4 and sampling locations of water quality monitoring

are shown in figure-3.10 and figure-3.11. The Indian standard specification for drinking water is given as

annexure-VII and CPCB standards of classification of inland surface water is given as annexure-VIII. The

physico-chemical characteristics of the different ground water samples and surface water samples are

presented in the tables-3.5 and table-3.6.

TABLE-3.4 DETAILS OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER MONITORING LOCATIONS

No. Sampling Locations

Bearing

W. R. T. Project

Site

Approximate Radial Distance

from Project Site (Km)

GROUND WATER

1. Project site (GW1) -- --

2. Bileshvarpura (GW2) NE 3.26

3. Irana (GW3) NW 4.0

4. Budasan (GW4) WNW 4.22

5. Rajpur (GW5) N 5.3

6. Achrasan (GW6) SSW 2.5

7. Lunasan (GW7) SSE 3.0

8. Chhatral city (GW8) E 3.4

SURFACE WATER

1. Pond Near Chhatral City (SW1) E 3.7

2. Narmada river Near Piyaj Village

(SW2) SSE 6.2

3. Narmada river Karan Nagar (SW3) SW 3.6

4. Pond Near Rangpurda Village (SW4) WSW 7.0

5. Pond Near Budasan Village (SW5) W 3.9

6. Pond Near Irana Village (SW6) NW 3.7

7. Pond Near Untva Village (SW7) NW 6.77

8. Pond Near Rajpur Village (SW8) N 5.9

GW= Ground water, SW= Surface water.

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-3.5 BASELINE GROUND WATER QUALITY

No. Parameters Unit

Locations

Project site

(GW1)

Bileshvarpur

a (GW2) Irana (GW3)

Budasan

(GW4)

Rajpur

(GW5)

Achrasan

(GW6)

Lunasan

(GW7)

Chhatral city

(GW8)

1. pH - 7.61 7.55 7.84 7.71 7.52 7.67 7.67 7.67

2. Temperature 0 C 22.3 23.1 22.8 22.4 23.5 23.6 22.1 23.0

3. Turbidity NTU 1.2 1.7 1.6 1.0 1.2 1.0 1.1 1.2

4. Electrical

Conductivity ms/cm 2950 2154 875 1416 872 2852 1834 1372

5. Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 6.5 5.9 6.2 6.6 6.6 6.5 6.3 6.0

6. Total Dissolved

Solids (TDS) mg/l 1919 1392 608 924 560 1896 1284 888

7. Total Alkalinity

(as CaCO3) mg/l 444 340 268 288 296 280 476 320

8. Total Hardness

(as CaCO3) mg/l 589.2 436.7 267.8 366.7 280.2 539.7 362.6 337.8

9. Calcium Hardness

(as CaCO3) mg/l 370.8 290.5 164.8 257.5 189.5 323.4 232.8 156.6

10. Magnesium Hardness mg/l 218.4 146.3 103 109.2 90.7 216.3 129.8 181.3

11. Chloride mg/l 739.2 579.9 145.2 343.9 130.6 520.6 634.3 205.0

12. Sulphate mg/l 285 175 77.5 140 50 162.5 200 95

13. Phenolic Compounds mg/l NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL

14. Ammonical Nitrogen mg/l NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL

15. Color Pt. Co.

Scale 1.0 1.0 1.0 <1.0 1 2.0 <1.0 <1.0

16. COD mg/l N.D N.D 8 N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

17. BOD mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

18. Nitrate mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

19. Fluoride mg/l 0.15 0.22 0.27 0.13 0.18 0.10 0.30 0.24

20. Sodium mg/l 267.3 208.6 136.5 161.2 118 242.3 193.7 130.4

21. Potassium mg/l 8 7.1 3.4 3.9 2.5 7.1 2.8 3.4

22. Salinity mg/l 755.4 840.7 529.2 610.1 233.2 1009 312.8 472.6

23. Total Phosphorus mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

24. Aluminum mg/l N.D N.D N.D ND N.D ND N.D ND

25. Arsenic mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D ND

26. Cadmium mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D ND

27. Chromium mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D ND

en-vιsι�n


No. Parameters Unit

Locations

Project site

(GW1)

Bileshvarpur

a (GW2) Irana (GW3)

Budasan

(GW4)

Rajpur

(GW5)

Achrasan

(GW6)

Lunasan

(GW7)

Chhatral city

(GW8)

28. Copper mg/l ND N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

29. Cyanide mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

30. Iron mg/l ND N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

31. Lead mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D ND

32. Mercury mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D ND

33. Manganese mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D ND

34. Nickel mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

35. Zinc mg/l N.D N.D N.D ND N.D ND N.D ND

36. Boron mg/l N.D ND N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D ND

37. Total Coliform (CFU/

100ml) Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent

38. Faecal Coliform (CFU/


TABLE-3.6 BASELINE SURFACE WATER QUALITY

No. Parameters Unit

Locations

Pond Near

Chhatral

City (SW1)

Narmada

river Near

Piyaj Village

(SW2)

Narmada

river Karan

Nagar (SW3)

Pond Near

Rangpurda

Village

(SW4)

Pond Near

Budasan

Village

(SW5)

Pond Near

Irana Village

(SW6)

Pond Near

Untva Village

(SW7)

Pond Near

Rajpur

Village

(SW8)

1. pH - 7.87 7.19 7.93 8.05 7.98 7.08 7.72 7.34

2. Temperature 0 C 25.3 24.8 25.1 25.8 25.2 25.0 26.0 24.9

3. Turbidity NTU 1.1 1.6 4.2 1.4 1.0 2.9 1.3 4.0

4. Electrical

Conductivity ms/cm 967.4 1024 475.3 716.2 455.5

851.4 894.9 472.5

5. Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 7.4 7.8 7.9 7.1 7.0 6.6 7.2 6.8

6. Total Dissolved

Solids (TDS) mg/l 492 388 176 511 203 455 321 243

7. Total Alkalinity

(as CaCO3) mg/l 192 240 108 212 160 364 212 176

8. Total Hardness

(as CaCO3) mg/l 123.6 107.1 57.7 90.6 76.2 135.9 92.7 80.3

9. Calcium Hardness mg/l 65.9 61.8 39.1 63.9 45.3 82.4 72.1 65.9

10. Magnesium mg/l 57.7 45.3 18.5 26.8 30.9 53.6 20.6 14.4

en-vιsι�n


No. Parameters Unit

Locations

Pond Near

Chhatral

City (SW1)

Narmada

river Near

Piyaj Village

(SW2)

Narmada

river Karan

Nagar (SW3)

Pond Near

Rangpurda

Village

(SW4)

Pond Near

Budasan

Village

(SW5)

Pond Near

Irana Village

(SW6)

Pond Near

Untva Village

(SW7)

Pond Near

Rajpur

Village

(SW8)

Hardness

11. Chloride mg/l 198.6 167.6 43.2 291.9 86.0 239.4 131.6 96.2

12. Sulphate mg/l 95 80 25 100 17.5 55 77.5 40

13. Phenolic

Compounds mg/l NIL NIL 0.39 0.73 NIL NIL 0.28 NIL

14. Ammonical

Nitrogen mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

15. Color Pt. Co. 10 9 13 11 11 5 8 9

16. COD mg/l 12 20 24 16 34 24 16 12

17. BOD mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

18. Nitrate mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

19. Fluoride mg/l 0.5 0.34 0.46 0.12 0.19 0.29 0.3 0.41

20. Sodium mg/l 68.6 54.4 38.7 86 59.2 43.3 21 35.2

21. Potassium mg/l 5.2 3.6 2.2 7.4 2.0 3.3 2.7 2.0

22. Salinity mg/l 310.8 251.2 180.3 329.1 277.5 236.2 205.6 175.6

23. Total Phosphorus mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

24. Aluminum mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

25. Arsenic mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

26. Cadmium mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

27. Chromium mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

28. Copper mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

29. Cyanide mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

30. Iron mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

31. Lead mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

32. Mercury mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

33. Manganese mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

34. Nickel mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

35. Zinc mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

36. Boron mg/l N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D N.D

37. Total Coliform (CFU/


38. Faecal Coliform (CFU/



3.4.3.1 PHYSICO-CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF WATER

Ground Water Groundwater samples from different villages during study period was collected once during monitoring

period and analyzed. The Physio-chemical characteristics of the groundwater are presented in the

table-3.5. The pH varied in the range of 7.52 - 7.84, turbidity 1.0 – 1.7 NTU, total hardness 50.9 - 262.6

mg/l, dissolved solids 560 - 1919 mg/l, Sulphate 50 - 285 mg/l and Alkalinity 268 - 476 mg/l. Chloride

varied from 130.6 – 739.2 mg/l. Nitrate and heavy metals concentrations were observed to be below Indian

standard/specification for drinking water IS 10500-1992.

Surface Water The Physio-chemical characteristics of surface water are summarized in table-3.6. The pH varied is from

7.08 – 8.05 the turbidity varied from 1.0 – 4.2 NTU, the dissolved solids varied from 203 - 511 mg/l, total

hardness varied between 57.7 – 135.9 mg/l, chloride varied from 43.2 – 291.9 mg/l, the sulphate varied

from 17.5 – 100 mg/l. The nutrient values in the form of nitrate were not observed. The overall surface

water quality was found to be average and the water should be treated before using it for drinking purpose.

3.4.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT Noise is defined as unwanted sound. Noise is a disturbance to the human environment that is increasing at

such a high rate that it will become a major threat to the quality of human lives. There are numerous effects

on the human environment due to the increase in noise pollution.

Scientists have recently found that the continuous exposure to noise with a volume more than 70 decibels

can lead to permanent hearing damage. Excessive noise levels can also lead to increase of heart beat, blood

pressure and blood cholesterol. It also has the potential to harm the respiratory and digestive systems.

Constant noise can lead to stress disorders, which could further develop into ulcers or high blood pressure.

A large amount of noise every day not only causes stress for people but also contribute to mental illness,

loss of productivity. Sleep deprivation usually occurs for people at a decibel of 45 or higher at 85 decibels

hearing damage occurs. People of all ages who already experience health problems are at very high risk.

Noise pollution also effects the vegetation causing poor quality of crops. It also damages the nervous

system of animals. Loud noise also weakens the buildings, bridges and monuments.

Reconnaissance The details of location of background noise monitoring station are given in table-3.7 and figure-3.12.

Results of noise monitoring are given in table-3.8.

Equivalent Sound Levels or Equivalent Continuous Equal Energy Level (Leq) There is large number of noise scales and rating methods based on some sort of average of weighted

average quantities derived from the detailed noise characteristics. Equivalent sound levels or Equivalent

continuous equal energy level (Leq) is a statistical value of sound pressure level that can be equated to any

fluctuating noise level and forms a useful measure of noise exposure and forms basis of several of the noise

indices used presently.

Leq is defined as the constant noise level, which over a given time, expands the same amount of energy, as

is expanded by the fluctuating level over the same time. This value is expressed by the equation:

Leq = 10 log Σ (10)Li/10

× ti

Where, n = Total number of sound samples,

Li = The noise level of any ith

sample

ti = Time duration of ith sample,

Expressed as fraction of total sample time

Leq has gained wide spread acceptance as a scale for the measurement of long term noise exposure. Hourly

equipment noise levels in the identified impact zone are monitored for day and time separately using sound

level meter. All the values are reported in Leq and in case of equipment noise, Sound pressure level are

monitored 1.5 m away from the machine and assessed with respect to standard prescribed in factory Act.

i=n

i=1


Methodology for Noise Monitoring Noise standards have been designated for different types of area, i.e. residential, commercial, industrial and

silence zones, as per ‘The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000, Notified by Ministry of

Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February 14, 2000. Different standards have been stipulated for day

time (6 am to 10 pm) and night time (9 pm to 10 am).

Ambient noise level monitoring was done at same locations where ambient air monitoring was carried out

within a study area. The locations are away from the major roads and major noise sources so as to measure

ambient noise levels. One day monitoring was carried out at the locations during the study period. The

frequency of monitoring was set at an interval of 15 seconds over a period of 10 minutes per hour for 24-

hours. The observed Equivalent sound levels (Leq) values in dBA are given in table-3.8 for each monitoring

location in distinguished form of day time (6 am to 10 pm) and night time (10 pm to 6 am). All

measurements were carried out when the ambient conditions were unlikely to adversely affect the results.

TABLE-3.7 DETAILS OF LOCATIONS FOR BACKGROUND NOISE MONITORING STATIONS

No. Name of Village Bearing W.R.T. Approximate Radial

Distance (km)

Type of

Area

1. Project site (N1) -- -- Industrial

2. Bileshvarpura (N2) NE 3.26 Residential

3. Irana (N3) NW 4.0 Residential

4. Budasan (N4) WNW 4.22 Residential

5. Rajpur (N5) N 5.3 Residential

6. Achrasan (N6) SSW 2.5 Residential

7. Lunasan (N7) SSE 3.0 Residential

8. Chhatral City (N8) E 3.4 Residential

TABLE-3.8 BACKGROUND NOISE LEVELS

No. Location Category

of Area

Noise Level (Leq) in dBA

(Day Time) (0600 to 2200 hrs.)

Noise Level (Leq) in dBA

(Night Time) (2200 to 0600 hrs.)

1. Project site (N1) Industrial 51.6-77.9 45.1-68.8

2. Bileshvarpura (N2) Residential 49.5-65.4 39.7-63.2

3. Irana (N3) Residential 42.3-60.1 31.9-58.5

4. Budasan (N4) Residential 46.7-69.3 33.6-60.4

5. Rajpur (N5) Residential 44.2-64.7 37.5-53.0

6. Achrasan (N6) Residential 49.3-70.5 41.4-59.3

7. Lunasan (N7) Residential 45.6-67.5 37.2-55.0

8. Chhatral City (N8) Residential 49.8-72.3 39.5-69.4

Baseline Noise Levels

The noise level measured in study area at different locations is given in table-3.8. The noise level at the

project site was found 51.6-77.9 dBA in daytime 45.1-68.8 dBA in night time. The noise levels varied in the

residential area of the study area during day time [night time] in the range of 42.3-77.9 (31.9– 69.4) dBA.

The noise sources identified in industrial zone are vehicular traffic, industrial and commercial activities.

CPCB recommendation for community noise exposure in different category of area i.e. residential,

commercial, industrial and silence zone is given as annexure-IX, while Damage risk criteria for hearing loss

given by occupational safety & health administration (OSHA) is given as annexure-X. The observed noise

levels were below the stipulated standards of CPCB.


Noise Levels Due to Transportation Noise levels were also measured at two different locations in November, 2016. The equivalent noise level

Leq (60 min average) measured at a distance of 10 m and 20 m from the edge of the road at each of the

locations are presented in table-3.9.

TABLE-3.9 NOISE LEVELS DUE TO TRANSPORTATION

No. Sampling Location Time Noise Level in dBA

10 m from Edge of The Road 20 m From Edge of The Road

1. Kadi Chhatral Road Day 73.1 67.8

Night 56.5 52.3

2. SH-133 Near Chhatral City Day 53.3 52.5

Night 47.2 45.0

Community Noise Levels The communities close to the project site are not exposed to major noise sources. The commercial activities

and transport apart from natural sources contribute to community noise levels. The noise levels close to

project site were low and within the stipulated standards of CPCB for the respective designated areas.

3.4.4.1 TRAFFIC STUDY To determine current traffic volumes on the road, the traffic studies have been accomplished. This study

will give an idea about expected future traffic volumes as a part of overall impact assessment for the

project. The traffic densities may vary based on working days and time, and also may vary in day and night

times. This survey was conducted during normal working day to get a clear picture of traffic density.

Selection of Sampling Location

The traffic density study was conducted at Chhatral which is about 2.8 km away from the project site.

Methodology

Vehicular Count The vehicles moving in both the directions were counted continuously for 24 hours at one location. The

vehicles were counted every hour and recorded under respective category. The maximum traffic count in an

hour is termed as peak hour traffic.

Categorization of Traffic The vehicles were categorized under various heads like heavy motor vehicles such as buses, trucks and

tankers (10 wheelers), light motor vehicles (cars, jeeps), three wheelers (auto rickshaws, 3-wheel tempo,

Bicycles etc.) two wheelers (scooters, motor cycles etc.).

Results and Discussions The summary of daily traffic count for the location was monitored during the study period is summarized

below and percentage of composition of the vehicles is given below. It was observed that the cars/jeeps and

trucks/buses forms the major volume of the traffic. The overall total traffic PCU of this road is minimal.

Presentation of Results The present level of traffic has been converted to Passenger Car Units (PCU) at this location as per the

conversion factors stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). The Passenger Car Unit (PCU) recorded at

the selected traffic location, which is towards Chhatral is about 12385.5 PCU.

Location:

Chhatral Heavy vehicle Four wheel Three wheel Two wheel

3307 1842 421 824

PCU rating as per Indian

Road Congress (IRC) 3 1 0.5 0.5

PCU 9921 1842 210.5 412

TOTAL PCU 12385.5

Total

vehicle

(24 Hr.)

Name and No. of vehicle % Composition

Heavy

vehicle

Four

wheel

Three

wheel

Two

wheel Heavy

Four

wheel

Three

wheel

Two

wheel

6394 3307 1842 421 824 51.72 28.81 6.58 12.89


3.4.5 SOIL ENVIRONMENT Soil samples were collected from eight different locations within the study area in the study period. The

locations selected for collection of soil samples are presented in table-3.10 & figure-3.13. The analysis

results of soil samples collected from the study area given in table-3.11.

The eight soil samples collected from surrounding areas including project site were assessed for physical

and chemical quality parameters. The porosity ranged from 30-74 % and WHC from 29-60 %. The EC

ranged from 700 – 1078 µs/cm. The soil pH varied from 7.7-8.7. These results indicate that in general soils

are saline/alkaline as EC exceeds 0.8 dS/m 800 µs/cm and pH is above 8.1. The OC varied from 1.9-3.5 %

and available nitrogen from 78.2-109.2 mg/kg. The available phosphorus and potassium ranged from 1870-

2978 mg/kg and 16.5-62.5 mg/kg respectively. Among basic cations there is predominance of sodium (84.3

to 141.7 mg/kg) followed by calcium (17.8 to 41.5 mg/kg) and magnesium (8.0 to 26.2 mg/kg).

3.4.5.1 SOIL QUALITY INTERPRETATION: The soil at the proposed site is saline as EC is > 0.8 dS/m and among basic cations there is predominance of

sodium which indicates that soils are likely to become alkaline, though pH is 7.73. This soil requires

removal of excess salts by using rain water as ground (bore well) water is saline and providing drainage.

The excess sodium could be replaced by applying gypsum and as per gypsum requirement of soil as well as

application of organic manure @ 50 tons/ha for improving percolation rate of clay loam soil. The fertility

status of soil indicate that nitrogen is low (>0.5% OC) to medium (0.5 to 0.75% OC). The available

phosphorus and potassium are in the range of medium (28 to 56 kg P2O5 & 140 to 280 kg/ha K2O) to high

(>56 kg P2O5/ha & >280kg K2O/ha). Soil at the greenbelt site should be monitored for EC, pH and ESP

once in a year after cessation of monsoon and fertilized with half the recommended dose of nitrogen,

phosphorus and potassium as all these nutrients are in the medium range of their availability at the site.

Variations in soil porosity and water holding capacity are presented in table-3.11.

TABLE-3.10 SAMPLING LOCATIONS OF SOIL MONITORING

No. Name of Village Bearing W.R.T. Approximate Radial

Distance (km)

Type of

Area

1. Project site (S1) -- -- Industrial

2. Bileshvarpura (S2) NE 3.26 Residential

3. Irana (S3) NW 4.0 Residential

4. Budasan (S4) WNW 4.22 Residential

5. Rajpur (S5) N 5.3 Residential

6. Achrasan (S6) SWS 2.5 Residential

7. Lunasan(S7) SSE 3.0 Residential

8. Chhatral city (S8) E 3.4 Residential

TABLE-3.11 PHYSICO-CHEMICALS CHARACTERISTICS OF SOIL

No Parameter Unit Project

Site (S1)

Bileshvar

pura (S2)

Irana

(S3)

Budasa

n (S4)

Rajpur

(S5)

Achrasa

n (S6)

Lunasan

(S7)

Chhatra

l (S8)

1 Porosity % 30 48 74 41 58 40 30 60

2 Water holding

capacity

% 55 51 29 60 42 32 39 54

3 Particle size Distribution

a Sand % 07 09 70 24 15 19 76 28

b Silt % 13 20 08 36 20 11 14 52

c Clay % 80 61 22 40 65 70 10 20

4 Texture - Loam Loam Sandy Loam Loam Loam Sandy Loam


No Parameter Unit Project

Site (S1)

Bileshvar

pura (S2)

Irana

(S3)

Budasa

n (S4)

Rajpur

(S5)

Achrasa

n (S6)

Lunasan

(S7)

Chhatra

l (S8)

5 pH - 7.73 8.29 7.90 8.21 8.52 8.70 8.20 7.88

6 Electrical

Conductivity µs/cm 1032 810 1050 854 700 952 1078 852

7 Cation

Exchange

Capacity

meq/

100g 30 22 27 19 26 30 40 32

8 Calcium mg/kg 17.8 28.5 51 35.6 22.5 41.5 24 39

9 Magnesium mg/kg 10 16.7 21 14.2 8 26.2 9.9 13.7

10 Sodium as Na mg/kg 84.3 129.2 133 118.2 96.4 141.7 84.2 122.4

11 potassium mg/kg 16.5 30.5 62.5 30 60 40 16.5 21

12 Phosphorus mg/kg 1870 2121 2978 2275 2700 2376 1942 2239

13 Available

Nitrogen mg/kg 78.3 105 90.5 103.7 78.4 109.2 78.2 107

14 Total Organic

carbon (OC)

% 2.30 2.0 3.50 2.20 2.17 2.61 1.90 2.84

3.4.6 LANDUSE Land Use (LU) refers to man’s activities and various uses, which are carried on land. Land Cover (LC)

refers to natural vegetation, water bodies, rock/soil, artificial cover and others resulting due to land

transformation. Although land use is generally inferred based on the cover, yet both the terms land use and

land cover are closely related and interchangeable. Knowledge about the existing land use and trends of

change is essential if the nation is to tackle the problems associated with the haphazard and uncontrolled

growth. A systematic framework is needed for updating the land use and land cover maps that will be

timely, relatively inexpensive and appropriate for different needs at both national and state levels. The

rapidly developing technology of remote sensing offers an efficient and timely approach to the mapping and

collection of basic land use and land cover data over large area.

It is required to carry out the land use / land cover study for the project study area (10 km radius) to obtain

the necessary environmental clearances from statutory authorities. The objective of the study is to carryout

land use / land cover study for the proposed project. The LU / LC study is carried out using the Satellite

Imageries (IRS RS2 LISS IV FX Rabi and Khariff) in addition to Survey of India Toposheet. Appropriate

guidelines are followed while preparing the LU / LC map for the project study area.

Scope of the work

The LU / LC study shall be carried out for a study area of 10 km radius taking site as centre using the

satellite imageries (IRS RS2 LISS III) for Rabi / Khariff season..

� Procurement of latest satellite imagery (IRS RS2 III / IV 5.8m Resolution) based on availability) Rabi

or Khariff seasons.

� Satellite imagery processing and interpretation of land use as per land use classification covering 10

km radius of proposed Project Site.

� Calculation of land use breakup w. r. t. each land use category covering 10 km of proposed Project

Site.

� Preparation and submission of reports, satellite imageries and maps.

Methodology The land use / land cover map is prepared by adopting the interpretation techniques of the image in

conjunction with collateral data such as Survey of India topographical maps and census records. Image

classification can be done by using visual interpretation techniques and digital classification using any of

the image processing software. For the present study, ERDAS 9.1 version software is used for

preprocessing, rectification, enhancements and classifying the satellite data for preparation of land use land


cover map for assessing and monitoring the temporal changes in land use land cover and land

developmental activities.

The imagery is interpreted and ground checked for corrections. The final map is prepared after field check.

Flow chart showing the methodology adopted is given in the different land use / land cover categories in the

study area has been carried out based on the NRSC land use / land cover classification system. For analysis

and interpretation, and preparation of LU / LC map, two types of data are needed:

1. Basic data includes Fused data of LISS IV FX

Toposheets on 1:50,000

Local knowledge

Area map on any scale to transfer details

Reports and other literature of the study area

2. Ground data:

Ground data is very much essential to verify and to increase the accuracy of the interpreted classes and also

to minimize the field work.

Area under different landuse The land use classification within a distance of 10 km radius from the project location and the areas falling

under the respective classifications are given as table-3.12 and Land use pattern of the study area as per

satellite imagery is given as figure-3.4 & Satellite Imagery of the study area is shown as figure-3.5.

TABLE-3.12 AREA STATISTICS OF LANDUSE/LAND COVER MAP

No. Land use Area (Sq. Km) %

1. BUILT-UP LAND

A. Settlements

B. Industrial area

20.096

11.932

6.4

3.8

2. WATERBODIES A. Tank/Major canal etc.

15.386

4.9

3. CROP LAND A. Single crop

B. Double crop

217.602

25.434

69.3

8.1

4. WASTELANDS A. Land with scrub

B. Land without scrub

16.328

7.222

5.2

2.3

TOTAL 314 100


FIGURE-3.4 LAND USE / LAND COVER MAP OF 10 KM RADIUS FROM STUDY AREA


FIGURE-3.5 SATELLITE IMAGERY OF THE STUDY AREA (10 KM RADIUS)


3.4.7 SOCIO - ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT An assessment of socio - economic environment forms an integral part of an EIA study. Therefore, baseline

information for the same was collected during the study period. The baseline socio - economic data

collected for the study region, has been identified for the four major indicators viz. demography, civic

amenities, economy and social culture. The baseline status of the above indicators is compiled in

forthcoming sections.

Objective of Social Impact Assessment Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is now conceived as being the process of identifying and managing the

social issues of project development, and includes the effective engagement of affected communities in

participatory processes of identification, assessment and management of social impacts. Although SIA is

still used as an impact prediction mechanism and decision-making tool in regulatory processes to consider

the social impacts in advance of a permitting or licensing decision, equally important is the role of SIA in

contributing to the ongoing management of social issues throughout the whole project development cycle,

from conception to post-closure. Like all other fields of practice (discourses), SIA is a community of

practice with its own paradigm of theories, methods, case histories, expected understandings and values.

Thus SIA includes the processes of analyzing, monitoring and managing the intended and unintended social

consequences, both positive and negative, of planned interventions i.e. policies, programs, plans, projects.

Its primary purpose is to bring about a more sustainable and equitable development. Social impacts

examine changes in people's way of life, their culture, community, political systems, environment, health

and wellbeing, their personal and property rights and their fears and aspirations. Therefore, the baseline

socio - economic data was collected for the study region, has been identified in the four major indicators

viz. demography, civic amenities, employment and economy and social culture. The baseline status of the

above indicators is compiled in forthcoming sections.

Major Objectives of the Study

• To understand the socio-economic status of the villages

• To study the perceptions of people about the impact of proposed project

Stakeholders’ identification Any project usually has some negative impacts on the local population. Displacement and/or

health/socioeconomic hazard are traumatic experience in spite of compensation paid and mitigation

measures adopted. Therefore proper identification of stakeholders and appropriate consultation on the

implementation plan and participation of affected people in decision making are of utmost importance. This

helps the stakeholders in understanding the project objectives and needs; and in communicating their

willingness, views and preferences. Thus it ensures increased participation of people through better

acceptance of the project. Stakeholders' consultation was done during Social Impact Assessment (SIA) at

the project locations and nearby villages within 10 km radius area of the proposed project. Planned

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities are suggested based on findings of this social impact

assessment report.

Methodology

(a) A detailed desk review of reports and secondary data related to the socio-economic context of the

Project was undertaken for assessing the overall existing situation. Census records are referred.

(b) (i) Reconnaissance visits to the project site were made.

(ii) Screening of potential social impacts in the project influence area was carried out. During the

reconnaissance visit, public consultations and personal interview were conducted to gather feedback

from the local people on the proposed development and perceived socio-economic impacts.

Keeping this situation in view it was decided to undertake public consultations through group discussions

and personal interview with local residents in the PIA (Prospective Project beneficiaries and Project

Affected people).

Primary data collection: tools and techniques The survey team has used the purposive random sampling method at various stages. It was planned to

gather data from various stake holders. For the purpose of this study a structured Questionnaire schedule

related to socio-demographic variables and interview guide around the theme of perception of setting up the

project and their expectations from the company was prepared. This assessment takes into consideration the


beneficial socioeconomic impact that the production unit may have on the community. It further assesses

community's perception and their awareness regarding polluting components of the environment. Further it

considers the impact of the proposed project on the socio-economic status of the surrounding area and their

perception regarding this project. The field work duration was 01st October - 31th December, 2016 within

the study area of 10 km radius from the project site.

Secondary Data Collection Latest available census records were referred to understand demography related to Infrastructure facilities,

category of population, Economic Status, Health Status, Education Status, and Civic Amenities etc.

Data analysis and interpretation Collected data are analyzed through qualitative and quantitative method of analysis.

Limitations Study is limited to the 10 km radius with purposive sampling from the proposed project site.

The Project Influence Area The PIA for the concerned industry comprises 52 major, minor villages and urban area in 10 km radial

distance from the proposed project. Demographical details as per census 2011 of the study area are given in

table-3.14.

TABLE-3.13 VILLAGE WISE DEMOGRAPHICAL DETAILS IN PIA

Sr.

No. Village Taluka

Census Population 2011

HH Population Literates Total Workers

Total Male Female Male Female Male Female

1 Dingucha

Kalol

732 3284 1705 1579 1370 1006 936 129

2 Pansar 1874 8438 4467 3971 3564 2693 2450 558

3 Isand 817 3881 2057 1824 1590 1216 1145 240

4 Vadavsvami 245 1186 597 589 455 359 333 21

5 Bileshvarpura 422 2071 1113 958 858 593 582 139

6 Pratappura 377 2054 1068 986 839 579 591 70

7 Piyaj 826 4342 2222 2120 1660 1065 1306 356

8 Sherisa 1183 6167 3084 3083 2272 1689 1764 757

9 Ramnagar 384 2038 1058 980 893 762 626 109

10 Vansajada 600 3035 1502 1533 1139 778 849 248

11 Dhamasna 1022 4864 2505 2359 2099 1742 1538 394

12 Chhatral INA 766 2660 1760 900 1385 516 1337 104

13 Chhatral (CT) 2161 10215 5438 4777 4367 3190 2978 412

14 Kalol (M) 23800 113153 59839 53314 48790 39158 32424 4927

15 Dhanot (OG) 273 1299 684 615 507 357 395 129

16 Ola (OG) 394 1976 1023 953 788 563 562 194

17 Borisana (OG) 3774 17998 9449 8549 7888 6670 5165 874

18 Arsodiya (CT) 1198 5859 3088 2771 2566 1997 1661 171

Kalol Taluka 40,848 1,94,520 1,02,659 91,861 83,030 64,933 56,642 9,832

19 Dangarva

Kadi

1129 5355 2797 2558 2244 1720 1551 358

20 Nandasan 2605 13440 6972 6468 5393 4483 3565 527

21 Kherpur 351 1704 862 842 700 581 509 50

22 Lakshmipura

(Nandasan) 358 1658 855 803 734 644 497 198


Sr.

No. Village Taluka

Census Population 2011

HH Population Literates Total Workers

Total Male Female Male Female Male Female

23 Chandarda 419 2210 1146 1064 847 579 627 255

24 Vadu 828 3909 2032 1877 1673 1273 1067 164

25 Ghumasan 951 4631 2408 2223 2002 1739 1345 252

26 Rajpur 1791 8621 4525 4096 3500 2599 2456 606

27 Sarsav 509 2486 1312 1174 1020 710 711 463

28 Aldesan 504 2423 1233 1190 925 666 718 246

29 Untva 428 2065 1081 984 840 647 559 157

30 Kundal (Part) 1984 9395 5020 4375 4022 2868 2791 294

31 Irana 717 3562 1863 1699 1379 961 1084 262

32 Jhulasan 1073 5046 2605 2441 1967 1404 1432 362

33 Ambavpura 276 1309 682 627 531 445 400 51

34 Chadasna 394 2097 1077 1020 785 541 584 123

35 Indrad 1006 4938 2665 2273 2086 1354 1445 574

36 Budasan 762 3249 1730 1519 1338 915 1015 237

37 Nani Kadi (Part) 601 2923 1481 1442 1210 1026 897 241

38 Shiyapura 221 1083 556 527 427 344 308 29

39 Rangpurda 420 1968 998 970 753 569 585 152

40 Pirojpur 230 1191 617 574 493 342 315 40

41 Karannagar 1436 6794 3489 3305 2779 2156 1969 577

42 Ankhol 389 1891 1020 871 799 521 617 32

43 Achrasan 390 2079 1034 1045 762 554 590 391

44 Lunasan 516 2522 1292 1230 1003 689 758 171

45 Vansol 388 1904 1000 904 778 521 572 487

46 Vamaj 810 3625 1895 1730 1514 1180 1144 495

47 Fuletra 616 3065 1620 1445 1128 694 974 147

48 Borisana 610 3092 1640 1452 1199 864 986 788

49 Jetpura 199 995 480 515 342 255 290 87

50 Adraj 1076 5415 2820 2595 2217 1626 1635 536

51 Vadavi 622 3146 1601 1545 1221 813 916 25

52 Kadi (M) 15344 73228 38931 34297 32303 25714 20617 2663

Kadi Taluka 39,953 1,93,019 1,01,339 91,680 80,914 61,997 55,529 12,040

Total 80,801 3,87,539 2,03,998 1,83,541 1,63,944 1,26,930 1,12,171 21,872

Source: Census 2011, District Gandhinagar and Mahesana, Gujarat

Findings of social impacts and community consultations The findings of the quick socioeconomic survey and various consultations at community level are presented

below:

Demography: In 2011, Gandhinagar district had population of 13,91,753. Decadal growth rate during

2001-2011 is 4.29% in the population compared to population as per 2001 census. With regards to sex ratio

in Gandinagar, it stood at 923 per 1000 male compared to 2001 census figure of 912. In census of India

2011, shows that density of population in Gandhinagar district is 650 people per sq. km. While other district

is Mahesana, it had population of 20,35,064. Decadal growth rate during 2001-2011 is 10.73% in the

population compared to population as per 2001 census. With regards to sex ratio in Mahesana, it stood at


926 per 1000 male compared to 2001 census figure of 927. In census of India 2011, shows that density of

population in Mahesana district is 462 people per sq. km. The details concerning the demographic structure

of the study were collected from Census record of Gandhinagar and Mahesana district. Study area covers

two taluka i.e. Kalol in Gandhinagar District and Kadi in Mahesana district. Total population density is

1234 persons per sq. km. Total population of the study area is 3,87,539 as per census 2011 from which

2,03,998 are males and 1,83,541 are females. Sex ratio of the study area as per census 2011 was 900 female

population per male population.

Literacy: Average literacy rate of Gandhinagar district in 2011 census were 84.16 compared to 76.59 of

2001. Male and female literacy were 92.01 and 75.76 respectively in 2011. While in Mahesana district 2011

census were 83.16 compared to 75.22 of 2001. Male and female were 91.39 and 75.32 respectively in 2011.

Literacy level in the PIA is comparatively good which is also reflected in census data. Average literacy rate

of the study area was 75.05% as per census 2011.

Economic Profile- After assessment the study and observations implied that main occupations of the area

are industrial jobs and small business which grows with industrial activities. Economical background of the

area is general not so high.

Infrastructure Facilities: Study area is consist Kalol - Chhatral to Kadi industrial corridor. Due to this

industrial development basic infrastructural facilities are available in this region. Villages in the study area

are having road, water connection, electric connectivity, transportation facilities, etc.

Educational Facility- All villages are having educational facilities like angawadi and primary or middle

school. While villages not having secondary, higher secondary or technical school facilities can avail the

facility at Kadi, Kalol or Gandhinagar for higher education.

Water Supply: During assessment, drinking water facility is observed in the study area. Borewell and tap

water facilities are available in the study area through tank water.

Sanitation: During the assessment it is observed that villages in the study area are having sanitation facility

while some villages are having improper sanitation facility. Which need to be improved under Swachh

Bharat Mission scheme.

Health care facility: Study area is having available basic health care facilities. These PHCs are active.

Those villages not having PHC, they receive services from Aasha workers. For further, hospitals, private

clinics and other healthcare centers are available at Chhatral, Kalol and Kadi.

Culture: Culture of the study area is mixed and multiculturalism seen as Kalol to Chhatral to Kadi is

industrial belt. As one of the largest industrial area, multiculturalism is seen in the area while other areas of

the study area are normal.

Communication and Transportation: In respect of development of transportation facilities especially in

road, state has made commendable progress. Communication facilities in this region are quite good due to

industrial cluster. The entire study area is connected by bus and other means of transportation facilities.

Approach roads are in all forms like paved road, mud road, footpath, navigable waterway, etc.

Power Supply: Electric power is one of the basic and key infrastructures in the growing economy. It

occupies a distinct role in the development of industry and agriculture. It is also a key factor in the socio-

economic transformation in rural areas. All villages are electrified in the region and electricity is available

for all-purpose.

Socio-Economic Survey

Sampling Method Socio-economic survey was conducted with the help of predesigned tool to measure the socio-economic

status of the people in the study area. In all, there are 52 villages located in all directions with reference to

project site. On the basis of purposive random sampling, adult male/female from these villages were

selected to collect the information related to socio-economic status. Individual interviews with the adult


male/female, common meetings were conducted in which heads of the villages, panchayat representatives,

and other stakeholders like, school teacher, anganwadi worker, PHC incharge, gram sewak etc were

present.

The salient socio-economic features observed under the study are:

• Local people are having main occupation of agriculture related activities while new generation of

people are intended to join jobs in industrial sector.

• Most of the people in study area use LPG gas, firewood and Kerosene as the main source of fuel for

cooking purpose.

• Average literacy level among the people is about 75.05%. Among women in the study area, literacy

level is less, as the educational facilities available in the study area.

• Almost villages do not have any problem in communication and transportation facilities. Road

conditions are good. There is bus facility available in the interior villages.

• Medical facilities available in the area. Lack of drainage and control of mosquitoes nuisance, have

resulted in higher prevalence of malaria in the area, especially during rainy season.

• Electricity facility is available in villages. Nobody complained about electricity problem in the

study area.

Awareness and opinion of the people about the project:

For the assessment of awareness about the project activities and opinion about it, following salient

observations were recorded:

• During survey it was observed that no awareness in villages about the proposed project as many

industries are exist in the industrial belt.

• People in the region expect job opportunities as their complained was outsiders are getting

employment more than locals and companies should contribute for the improvement in educational,

transportation and sanitation facility from project.

3.4.8 DESCRIPTION OF THE BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Introduction

Biodiversity is often considered synonymous with species richness of the area. Identifying, measuring, and

monitoring biodiversity is a complex exercise. The Biodiversity assessment generally concern with,

conducting biodiversity inventories; for assessing existing biodiversity. This provides the information on

the biodiversity richness of the area under consideration. The selection of indicators differs for biodiversity

monitoring as per the output required. Various criteria have been developed for selection of indicators,

taking into account biological as well as logistical aspects (Noss, 1990, UNEP, 1992).

Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment

Conference of parties to the Convention on Biological diversity (CBD) held at Curitiba, Brazil on March

20th – 31st, 2006 suggested biodiversity to be considered in impact assessment by providing voluntary

guidelines on biodiversity inclusive Environmental Impact Assessment. CBD provides a strong

international platform for applying impact assessment techniques to biodiversity conservation. It

specifically calls for impact assessment measures to ensure that biodiversity is addressed in projects, plan

and policy decision (Article14). An underlying justification for the application of impact assessment is also

given in Article -8 which is for promoting the protection of ecosystems, natural habitats, promoting

environmentally sound and sustainable development in areas next to the protected areas.

Biological Diversity The variety and variability of organisms and ecosystems is referred to as biological diversity or Bio

diversity. Biodiversity is a term which has gained enormous importance in the past few years. Technically,

it is a contraction of 'biological diversity'. For the purposes of the CBD (Article 2 Use of Terms),

'Biological Diversity' is "the variability among living organisms from all sources including, inter alia,

terrestrial, marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexes of which they are part; this

includes diversity within species, between species and of ecosystems". In practice, 'biodiversity' is most

often used as a collective noun synonymous with nature or 'Life on Earth' (WCMC Biodiversity Series No

5, 1996).


The biodiversity, we see today is the result of billions of years of evolution, shaped by natural processes.

The vast array of interactions among the various components of biodiversity makes the planet habitable for

all species, including humans. There is a growing recognition that, biological diversity is a global asset of

tremendous value to present and future generations. At the same time, the threat to species and ecosystems

has never been as great as it is today. Species extinction caused by human activities continues at an

alarming rate. Protecting biodiversity is for our self-interest and also for the future generation.

Ecological Impact Assessment Ecological Impact Assessment (EcIA) is used to predict and evaluate the impacts of development activities

on ecosystems and their components, thereby providing the information needed to ensure that ecological

issues are given full and proper consideration in development planning. Environmental impact assessment

(EIA) has emerged as a key to sustainable development by integrating social, economic and environmental

issues in many countries. EcIA has a major part to play as a component of EIA but also has other potential

applications in environmental planning and management. Ecological Impact Assessment provides a

comprehensive review of the EcIA process and summarizes the ecological theories and tools that can be

used to understand, explain and evaluate the ecological consequences of development proposals.

Environmental impact assessments have become an integral part of development projects in India ever

since 1994, to formulate policies and guidelines for environmentally sound economic development. Proper

assessment of biological environment and compilation of its taxonomical data is essential for the impact

prediction, yet biodiversity is often inadequately addressed. There is a growing recognition of the need of

biodiversity considerations in environmental impact assessments. Important barriers to the incorporation of

biodiversity in impact assessment include low priority for biodiversity and limitations in one or more of the

following areas: capacity to carry out the assessments; awareness of biodiversity values; adequate data; and

post-project monitoring.

Consistent and regularly updated data on regional and local taxonomy and floristic and faunal diversity of

the areas are almost non-existent in country as diverse as India. Instant information on biodiversity profiles

of the area, where the proposed project is setting up, is an essential part of the baseline studies of EIA. In

such a situation, good primary baseline biodiversity survey is a pre-requisite for the collection of reliable

data. The professional ethic of the Biodiversity practitioners should be their will and skill to conduct

scientific field surveys. These contributions towards biodiversity surveys may sometimes recognized as the

actual value additions in terms of new records or a new data base but are more often recognized in the

validation and updating of the existing information base.

Period of Study

A field study for biodiversity survey was carried out during October 2016 – December 2016).

Methodology

The primary objective of survey was to describe the floristic and faunal communities within the study area.

Extrapolation and prediction techniques were used to limit the number of sites to be assessed. The

knowledge of species habitats requirement, soil type, terrain, vegetation etc. were used to predict species

occurrence.

This Extrapolation Assessment Programme conducts preliminary for the assessment of biological value of

poorly known area. The biological value of an area can be characterized by the species richness, degree of

spices endemism, uniqueness of the ecosystem and magnitude of threats of extinction. This Rapid

biodiversity assessment were undertaken by identifying potentially rich sites from satellite imaginary

(Google Earth) and conducting the field survey in the potential habitats. GPS was utilized for locating field

sample plots as well as gathering positional attributes of sighted flora and faunal species.

For Floral survey, sample plots have been randomly distributed within the identified rich biodiversity

potential habitats that falls under study area. The methodology adopted for faunal survey involved; faunal

habitat assessment, random intensive survey, opportunistic observations, diurnal bird observation, active

search for reptiles, active search for scats and foot prints and review of previous studies. The aim was to set

baselines in order to monitor and identify trends after the commencement of production system activity.

Emphasis has been placed on presence of rare, endemic, migratory and threatened species, if any present in

the study area. Desktop literature review was conducted to identify the representative spectrum of


threatened species, population and ecological communities as listed by IUCN, ZSI, BSI and in Indian wild

Life Protection act, 1972. The status of individual species was assessed using the revised IUCN category

system.

FIGURE-3.6 STUDY AREA MAP

Source: Google Earth

Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment

Habitats Description of the Project Site and Its Immediate Surroundings The Project site (23°16'52.50"N, 72°24'47.72"E) is located is near to Kalol taluka of Gandhinagar district.

The approach road is adjacent to the Kadi-Chhatral highway in south direction and State Highway-41 is

around 2.8 km away from the project site in east direction, hence ecological impact due to this project on

these human receptors is expected to be minimum. The project site is surrounded by the other industries..

There is no eco-sensitive area likes forest patches, large water bodies that attract migratory and other

residential water fowls existing within the proximity of the project site, hence the direct impact due to the

project on these eco-sensitive receptors are also not envisaged. Few trees mainly Azadirachta indica

(Limbado), Peltophorum pterocarpum (Sonmukhi) are growing along the boundary wall of the project site.


The tree species, herbs, shrubs, climbers and major crops, were documented during this base line study. The

list of floral species documented in the study area is enlisted in

Trees Trees observed during the present survey are given in the following table-3.14. 36 trees species belong to

22 families are enumerated from the study area.

TABLE-3.14 TREE SPECIES IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Family & Scientific name Vernacular name

1. Family: Anacardiaceae

i. Mangifera indica L. Keri

2. Family: Annonaceae

ii. Polylathia longifolia (Conn.) Thw. Asopalav

3. Family: Arecaceae

iii. Cocos nucifera L. Narial

4. Family: Caesalpiniaceae

iv. Delonix regia (Boj.) Raf. Gulmohar

v. Delonixelata (L.) Gamble. Sandsro

vi. Cassia fistula L. Garmalo

vii. Peltophorum pterocarpum (DC.) Backer ex Heyne Sonmukhi

viii. Tamarindus indica L. Amali

5. Family: Caricaceae

ix. Carica papaya L. Papaya

6. Family: Casuarinaceae

x. Casuarina equisetifolia L. Sharu

7. Family: Combretaceae

xi. Terminalia catappa L. Badam

8. Family : Ehretiaceae

xii. Cordia gharaf (Forsk.) E. & A. Gundi

xiii. Cordia dichotoma Forst. Gunda

9. Family: Malvaceae

xiv. Thespesia populnea (L.) Sol.ex Corr. Paras piplo

10. Family: Meliaceae

xv. Azadirachta indica A.Juss Limbado

11. Family: Mimosaceae

xvi. Acacia auriculiformis L. Austrianbaval

xvii. Acacia leucophloea (Roxb) Willd Hermobaval



xviii. Acacia nilotica (L.) Del.subsp.indica (Bth.) Brenan Baval

xix. Albizialebbeck (L.) Bth. Siris

xx. Leucaenaleucocephala (Lam.) De Pardesi Baval

xxi. Pithecellobiumdulce (Roxb.) Bth. Gorasmli

xxii. Prosopiscineraria (L.) Druce Khyigdo

12. Family:Moraceae

xxiii. Ficus benghalensis L. Vad

xxiv. Ficus religiosa L. Piplo

13. Family:Moringaceae

xxv. Moringa oleifera Lam Sargavo

14. Family:Myrtaceae

xxvi. Eucalyptus sp. Nilgari

15. Family: Papilionaceae

xxvii. Erythrina variegata L. Pagario

16. Family: Rutaceae

xxviii. Limonia acidissima L. Kothi, Kotha

17. Family:Poaceae

xxix. Dendrocalamus strictus (Roxb) Bans

18. Family:Salvadoraceae

xxx. Salvadorapersica L. Piludo

xxxi. Salvadora oleoides Decne Piludi

19. Family:Sapotaceae

xxxii. Manilkara hexandra (Roxb.) Dub. Rayan

xxxiii. Manilkara zapota (L.) Chikoo

20. Family: Simaroubaceae

xxxiv. Ailanthus excelsa Roxb. Aurdso

21. Family: Rhamnaceae

xxxv. Zizyphus glabrata Heyne ex Roth. Bor

22. Family: Verbenaceae

xxxvi. Tectona grandis L.f. Sag

Shrubs Shrubs observed during the present survey are given in following table-3.15. 32 shrub species belong to 18

families are enumerated from the study area.

TABLE-3.15 SHRUBS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA


1. Family: Apocynaceae

i. Nerium indicum Lalkaren

ii. Thevetia peruviana Merr. Pili karan

2. Family: Asclepiadaceae

iii. Calotropis gigantea (L.) R. Br Akado

iv. Calotropis procera (Ait.) R. Br Akado

3. Family: Balanitaceae

v. Balanites aegyptiaca Ingorio

4. Family: Caesalpiniaceae

vi. Cassia auriculata L Aval

vii. Cassia occidentalis L. Sundro

viii. Caesalpinia crista L. Kachka



5. Family: Capparaceae

ix. Capparis decidua (forsk.) Edgew Kerdo

6. Family: Convolvulaceae

x. Ipomoea fistulosa Mart.ex Choisy Nasarmo

7. Family: Euphorbiaceae

xi. Euphorbia neriifolia L. Thor

xii. Jatropha curcas L. Ratanjot

xiii. Ricinus communis L. Devalo

8. Family: Lythraceae

xiv. Lawsonia inermis L. Mendhi


xv. Abelomoschus manihot (L.) Medic. Jagali bhindi

xvi. Gossypium herbaceum L. acerifolium Kapas

xvii. Hibiscus rosa –sinensis Jasund

10. Family: Musaceae

xviii. Musa paradisiaca L. Kela

11. Family: Mimosaceae

xix. Prosopis juliflora DC Gando baval

xx. Acacia jacquemontii Rh. Rato bjhval

xxi. Dichrostachys cinerea (L.) Mor Dhundhiyu

12. Family:Nyctaginaceae

xxii. Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Bougainvel


xxiii. Sesbania sesban (L.) Merr. Shevari

14. Family: Punicaceae

xxiv. Punica granatum L. Dadam

15. Family: Rhamnaceae

xxv. Zizyphus nummularia (Burm.f.) W. &. Chanibor

16. Family: Solanaceae

xxvi. Datura metel L Daturo

Solanum incanum L Ubhi ringan

xxvii. Solanum indicum

17. Family: Tiliaceae

xxviii. Triumfetta pentandra A. Rich.in Guill. & Perr Zipti

18. Family: Verbenaceae

xxix. Clerodendrum inerme (L.) Gaertn. Madhi

xxx. Lantana camara L.var.aculcata (L.) Mold. Ganthai

Herbs

Herbs observed during the present survey are given the following table-3.16. 67 herbs belong to 28 families

are enumerated from the study area.

TABLE-3.16 HERBS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA


1. Family Acanthaceae

i. Hygrophila auriculata (Schum.) Kanatashelio,Akaro

2. Family Amaranthaceae

ii. Aerva javanica (Burm.f.) Juss. Bur, Gorakhganjo

iii. Celosia argentea L. Lamdi

3. Family : Aponogetonaceae

iv. Aponogeton natans L.

4. Family: Asteraceae



v. Blumea mollis Bhutaco

vi. Blumea p. -

vii. Echinops echinatus Roxb Shulio

viii. Tridax procumbens L Pardesi Bhangro

ix. Parthenium hysterophorus L

x. Xanthium strumarium L. Gokhru

5. Family: Balsiminaceae

xi. Impatiens balsamina L. var. coccinea

6. Family: Boraginaceae

xii. Trichodesma indicum R. Br. Undha Fuli

7. Family: Commelinaceae

xiii. Commelina benghalensis L

xiv. C.forskalaei Vahl., Enum


xv. Cressa cretica L. Palio, Rudanti

xvi. Convolvulus arvensis L.

xvii. Evolvulus alsinoides (L.)

9. Family: Cyperaceae

xviii. Cyperus sp.

xix. Fimbristylis dichotoma Vahl.

xx. Fimbristylis sp

10. Family: Euphorbiaceae

xxi. Euphorbia hirta L.

11. Family: Gentianaceae

xxii. Nymphoides indicum (Roxb.) Kumudini

12. Family: Hydrocharitaceae

xxiii. Hydrilla verticillata (L.f.) Royle

xxiv. Ottelia alismodies L.

13. Family: Lamiaceae

xxv. Basilium polystachyon Dungrau Tulsi

xxvi. Ocimum gratissimum

xxvii. Ocimum basilicum L

xxviii. Ociumum sanctum L tulsi

14. Family: Liliaceae

xxix. Aloe barbadensis Mill. Kunvarpato


xxx. Abutilon indicum L. Khapat,Dabaliar

xxxi. Hibiscus punctatus

xxxii. Sida alba L Kandalo bala

xxxiii. Sida sp.

xxxiv. Pavonia zeylanica cav. -

16. Family : Myrtyniaceae

xxxv. Martynia annua L. Vinchhudo

17. Family: Nyctaginaceae

xxxvi. Boerhavia diffusa L. Satodi

18. Family: Nymphaeaceae

xxxvii. Nymphaea stellate Wild Kamal




xxxviii. Alysicarpus longifolious

xxxix. Cortalaria prostate

xl. Cortalaria juncea Shun

xli. Indigofera cardifoila Heyne ex Roth

xlii. Indigofera oblongifolia Forks. -

xliii. Indigofera sp.

xliv. Tehrosia purpurea L. Sarpankho

xlv. Tephrosia sps. -

xlvi. Medicago sativa L Lachko

xlvii. Cacia tora Kuvandio

20. Family: Poaceae

xlviii. Aleuropus lagopoides (L)

xlix. Cynodon barberi Rang.

l. Cynodon dactylon (L.)

li. Phragmites kara (Retz.)

lii. Sorghum bicolor (L.) Jowar

liii. Zea mays Makai

21. Family: Poligonaceae

liv. Poligonum sp.

22. Family: Pontederiaceae

lv. Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Kanphutti

23. Family: Potamogetonaceae

lvi. Potomogetonsp.

24. Family: Solanaceae

lvii. Solanum nigrum L. Piludi

lviii. Solanum surattense Brum. Bhoringni

25. Family: Scrophulariaceae

lix. Bacopa monnieri L.

26. Family: Tiliaceae

lx. Corchorus depressus Stocks Bhuphali

lxi. Corchorus aestunans L. Chunch

lxii. Triumfetta rotundifolia Lam. Zipto

27. Family: Typhaceae

lxiii. Typha angustata Bory & Chaub

28. Family: Zygophyllaceae

lxiv. Tribulus terrestris L.

Climbers and Twiners Climbers observed during the present survey are given in the following table-3.17. 14 Climbers belong to 6

families are enumerated from the study area.

TABLE-3.17 CLIMBERS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA


1. Family: Asclepiadaceae

i. Pentatropis spiralis (Forsk.) Decne Shingroti


ii. Ipomea cairica (L.)



iii. Ipomoea obscura L.

iv. Ipomea aquatica Forsk. Nadanivel

v. Ipomoea pes-caprae Dariani vel/Maryad vel

vi. Ipomoea pes-tigrides L

3. Family: Cucurbitaceae

vii. Corallocarpus epigeus (Arn.)

viii. Coccinia grandis Ghiloda

ix. Luffa cylindrica (L.) M. J. Roem Galku

4. Family: Cuscutaceae

x. Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Amarvel

5. Family: Menispermaceae

xi. Cocculus hirsutus (L.) Diels Vevdi


xii. Mucuna prurita Hk.f. Kavach, Koyli

xiii. Abrus precatorius L. Chanothi

Cultivated Plants in the Study Area The agricultural practices has occupied the majority of available the landscape. The crop practiced during

the winter season in this locality is Wheat (Triticum aestivum). The crop occupying the highest percentage

of the sown area of this region is taken as the major crop and all other possible alternative crops which are

sown in this region either as substitutes of the base crop in the same season or as the crops which fit in the

rotation in the subsequent season, are considered as minor crop.

Major Crops:

Major crops in the study area are Rice (Oryza sativa L.) Cotton (Gossypium herbaceum) and Wheat

(Triticum aestivum )

Minor crops: The minor crops of this region are Bajra (Pennisetum typhoides), Jowar (Sorghum bicolar ), Groundnut

(Arachis hypogaea)

Rare and Endangered Flora in the Study Area The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant

and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and

subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific

base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.

Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category, by RED

data book of Indian Plants. (Nayar and Sastry, 1990) and Red list of threatened Vascular plants (IUCN,

2010, BSI, 2003).

Endemic Plants of the Study Area De Candolle (1855) first used the concept of “Endemic”, which is defined as an area of a taxonomic unit,

especially a species which has a restricted distribution or habitat, isolated from its surrounding region

through geographical, ecological or temporal barriers. Among recorded plant species, during the survey

period, none can be assigned the status of endemic plant of this region.

Status of Forest and Their Category in the Study Area No natural forest land was observed in the study area.


Faunal Biodiversity in the Study Area For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to birds, reptiles,

amphibians, and butterfly species, a baseline survey had been conducted.

Birds of the Study Area Systematic account of the birds in the study area with the status of occurrence is given in the table-3.18

TABLE-3.18 BIRDS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Old Common name New Common Name Scientific Name Distribution

I ORDER: APODIFORMES

Family: Apodidae (swifts)

House swift Little Swift Apus affinis R

II ORDER: FALCONIFORMES

Family: Accipitridae (vulture, Sparrow hawk, Eagle, Harrier, Kite and Vulture)

Shikra Shikra Accipiter badius R

Black-winged Kite Black-winged Kite Elanus caeruleus R

Common Pariakh Kite Black Kite Milvus migrans

III. ORDER: : CICONIIFORMES

Family: Ardeidae (heron, Egret, Bittern)

Pond Heron Indian Pond-Heron Ardeola grayii R

Cattle Egret Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis R

Median or Smaller Egret Intermediate Egret Mesophoyx intermedia

Egretta intermedia

R

Little Egret Little Egret Egretta garzetta R

Large Egret Great Egret Casmerodius albus Rw

Family: Charadriidae (Plover, Stilt, Oystercatcher, Lapwing, Avocet )

Black-winged Stilt Black-winged Stilt Himantopus himantopus R

Red-wattled Lapwing Red-wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus R

Family: Ciconiidae (Open bill, stork, Adjutant)

Openbill stork Asian Open bill Anastomus oscitans R

Family: Phalacrocoracidae (Cormorant)

Indian Shag Indian Cormorant Phalacrocorax fuscicollis

Family: Pteroclidae (Sandgrouse)

Indian Sandgrouse Chestnut-bellied sandgrouse Pterocles exustus R

Family: Threskiornithidae (Spoonbill and Ibis)

Black Ibis Red-naped Ibis Pseudibis papillosa R

White Ibis Black-headed Ibis Threskiornis melanocephalus R

IV ORDER: COLUMBIFORMES

Family: Columbidae (Pigeon, Dove)

Blue Rock Pigeon Rock Pigeon Columba livia R

Ring Dove Eurasian Collared-Dove Streptopelia decaocto R

Rufous Turtle Dove Oriental Turtle-Dove Streptopelia orientalis R

V : ORDER: CORACIFORMES

Family: Dacelonidae (King fishers)

White breasted Kingfisher White-throated Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis R

Family: Meropidae (Bee Eater)

Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Merops leschenaulti R

Family: Coraciidae (Roller)

BlueJay or Roller Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis



VI. ORDER: CUCULIFORMES

Family: Centropodidae (Cocucal)

Crow-Pheasant or Coucal Greater Coucal Centropus sinensis R

Family: Cuculidae (cuckoo, Koel)

Koel Asian Koel Eudynamys scolopacea R

Indian Drongo Cuckoo Drongo Cuckoo Surniculus lugubris R

VII. ORDER: GALLIFORMES

Family: Phasianidae (Peafowl , Partridge, Quail, francolin, spur fowl, jungle fowl, Monal, )

Common Peafowl Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus R

Grey Partridge Grey Francolin Francolinus pondicerianus

VIII. ORDER: GRUIFORMES

Family: Rallidae (Waterhen, coot, crake water cock, Moorhen, Rail,)

White-breasted Water hen White-breasted Water hen Amaurornis phoenicurus R

IX. ORDER: PASSERIFORMES

Family: Paridae (Tit )

Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R

Family: Cisticolidae ( Warbler or Prinia)

Jungle Wern-Warbler Jungle Prinia Prinia sylvatica R

Family: Corvidae

Large Cuckoo-shrike Large Cuckoo-shrike Coracina macei

Coracina novaehollandiae

R

Raven Common Raven Corvus corax R

House Crow House Crow Corvus splendens R

Black drongo- King Crow Black Drongo Dicrurus macrocercus

Dicrurus adsimilis

R

Tree Pie Rufous Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda R

Family: Laniidae (shrike)

Rufous backed Shrike Long-tailed Shrike Lanius schach R

Family: Muscicapidae ( Short wing, Chat, Robin, Shama)

Indian Robin Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata R

Pied Bushchat Pied Bushchat Saxicola caprata R

Family: Nectariniidae ( Sun Birds, Flower pecker, Spider hunter )

Purple Sunbird Purple Sunbird Nectarinia asiatica R

Small Sunbird Crimson-backed Sunbird Nectarinia minima R

Family: Passeridae ( Avadavat,Pipit, Wagtail, Munia, Snowfinch, sparrow, weaver ,Accentor)

House Sparrow House Sparrow Passer domesticus R

Family: Pycnonotidae (Bulbul)

Red-whiskered Bulbul Red-whiskered Bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus R

Red-vented Bulbul Red-vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R

Family: Sturnidae (Myna, Starling)

Bank Myna Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus R

Indian Myna Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R

Family: Sylviidae ( Warbler, Browning, Fulvetta ,Babbler, Laughing thrash, Tailor birds)

Common Babbler Common Babbler Turdoides caudatus R

Jungle Babbler Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus R

Tailorbird Common Tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius R

X. ORDER: PSITTACIFORMES



Family: Psittacidae (Parrot and Parakeet)

Rose-ringed Parakeet Rose-ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri R

Note: R = Widespread Resident, r= Very Local Resident, RW =Resident and winter visitor

Ref WCMC, Check list of Indian Birds.

Butterflies from the Study Area

Butterflies observed during the present study are documented in the table-3.19

TABLE-3.19 BUTTERFLIES OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Scientific name & family Common name

1 Family: Papilionidae

i Papilio polytes Linnaeus Common Mormon

2 Family: Pieridae

ii Eurema hecabe Linnaeus Common Grass yellow

iii Ixias mariane Cramer White orange tip

iv Ixias pyrene Linnaeus Yellow orange tip

v Colotis danae Fabricus Crimson tip

3 Family: Nymphalidae

vi Danaus chrysippus Linnaeus Plain Tiger

vii Danaus genutia Cramer Stripped Tiger

viii Hypolimanas misippus Linnaeus Danaid egg fly

ix Mycalesis perseus Fabricius Common bush brown

Reptiles Reptiles in the region are given in the table-3.20.

TABLE-3.20 REPTILES OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Scientific name & family Common name

1 Calotes versicolor (Daudin) Common garden lizard

2 Ptyas mucosus (Linn.) Common rat snake

3 Hemidactylus flaviviridis (Ruppell) House Gecko

4 Sitana ponticeriana ( Cuvier) Fan-Throated Lizard

5 Indian Cobra* Naja naja (Linn.)

6 Russell’s Viper* Daboia russelii ( Shaw and Nodder)

7 Common Indian Krait* Bungarus caeruleus ( Schneider)

* Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers, during the interaction with them with pictorial

presentation.

Mammals The wild mammals observed other than domesticated ones from study area is documented in the table-3.21

TABLE-3.21 MAMMALS OBSEREVED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Common name C Scientific name & family

1 Indian field mouse Mus booduga (Gray)

2 Common Mongoose Herpestes edwardsi (Geoffroy)

3 Hare Lepus sp.

4 Five striped Palm squirrel Funambulus pennanii (Wroughton)


Sr. No. Common name C Scientific name & family

5 Nilgai* Boselaphus tragocamelus (Pallas)

6 Wild Boar* Sus scrofa Linnaeus

7 Bengal Hanuman Langur Semnopithecus entellus (Dufresne

Rare and Endangered Fauna of the Study Area as Per IUCN Red (2016) List

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant

and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and

subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific

base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.

Among the sighted fauna, while one bird; Black-headed Ibis (Threskiornis melanocephalus) is grouped

under near threatened category.

As per Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 Wild Life (Protection) Act 1972, as amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection

of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with

a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country.

Some of the sighted fauna were given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection)Act,1972 by including

them in different schedules. Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), is included in

schedule I of Wild life protection Act (1972), while many other birds are included in schedule IV.

Among the reptiles, Indian Cobra (Naja naja), and Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus) were provided

protection as per Schedule-II of Wild life protection act, (1972) Among mammals; (Bengal Hanuman

Langur/ Northern Plains Gray Langur (Semnopithecus entellus (Dufresne) and Common Mongoose

(Herpestes edwardsi), are schedule –II animals. The Indian Wild Boar (Sus scrofa) and Nilgai (Boselaphus

tragocamelus) are protected as Schedule-III animal. Five stripped palm squirrel and all Hares are included

in schedule IV of Wild Life Protection act 1972.

Table-3.22: Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act 1972

Group Species Schedule

Birds Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), Schedule I

Most of other birds Schedule IV

Reptiles Indian Cobra (Naja naja ), Schedule II

Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus) Schedule II

Mammals Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi) Schedule II

Five striped Palm squirrel (Funambulus pennanii) Schedule IV

Hare (Lepus sp. Schedule IV

Bengal Hanuman Langur, Northern Plains Gray

Langur (Semnopithecus entellus (Dufresne)

Schedule II

The Indian Wild Boar (Sus scrofa) Schedule IV

Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) Schedule III

Status of Forest and their category in the study area No natural forest land was observed in the study area except few scattered scrub cover in the barren lands

and area demarcated for grazing.

3.5 GEO HYDROLOGY

3.5.1 GENERAL GEOLOGY Geologically the area is part of Cambay basin and is occupied by the quaternary alluvium comprising silt

and sand.


FIGURE- 3.7 (A) GENERAL GEOLOGY OF GANDHINAGAR DISTRICT

(Source: District Resource Map, Geological Survey of India, 2002)


FIGURE- 3.7 (B) GENERAL GEOLOGY OF MAHESANA DISTRICT

Geomorphology Geomorphologically the district as whole has a flat planar topography.

3.5.2 DRAINAGE PATTERN OF THE AREA The study area is a part of North Gujarat Alluvial plain with neither hill features nor any prominent natural

water bodies. One of the most important feature of the drainage of the study area is lack of any definite

drainage system. No major river is crossing through the study area. Artificial drainage i.e. The Narmada

Canal System flows through the study area.

3.5.3 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT

As per the GWRE, 2011 report, all the Four Talukas of the district are Over Exploited. The level of Ground

Water Development varies from 102.93 % (Dehgam Taluka) to 148.46 % (Mansa Taluka). The overall

development in the district is 120.05 %, and as a whole the Gandhinagar district is Over Expoited. Though,

Improvement in Groundwater development is observed as a perusal of GWRE 2004, 2009 and 2011, but

there is no scope for further development of groundwater resources in the district. Great need of artificial

recharge and rainwater harvesting is required for efficient management of groundwater resources in the

district.

The details of Ground Water Resources and irrigation potential of the district is as follows which is given in

table-3.23.


TABLE-3.23 GROUNDWATER DEVELOPMENT OF DISTRICT

NAME OF

TALUKA

NET

ANNUAL

GROUND

WATER

AVAILABILITY

EXISTING GROSS

GROUND WATER DRAFT

FOR IRRIGATION

STAGE OF

GROUND WATER

DEVELOPMENT

(%)

CATEGORY

Dahegam 13408.31 13043.50 102.93 Over-exploited

Gandhinagar 12165.73 13250.80 115.72 Over-exploited

Kalol 10873.29 12424.00 122.90 Over-exploited

Mansa 8852.73 12553.70 148.46 Over-exploited

Kadi 13085.41 14688.21 119.11 Over-exploited

Total 45300.05 51272.00 120.05 Over-exploited

The groundwater potential estimated by Groundwater Resource Estimation Committee is given the

figure-3. 8.

FIGURE-3.8 WATER LEVEL MAP, GANDHINAGAR

Source: CGWB Report, Gandhinagar District

GROUND WATER RELATED ISSUES AND PROBLEMS The level of ground water development in Kalol taluka is 122.90%. The quality of ground water in the

shallow aquifer is poor in the south western part. The fluoride content is more than permissible limit in six

villages/ hamlets, whereas, in 13 villages/ hamlets the Nitrate is more the permissible limit.


FIGURE-3.9 LOCATION OF AMBIENT AIR MONITORING STATIONS


FIGURE-3.10 LOCATIONS OF GROUND WATER SAMPLING STATIONS


FIGURE-3.11 LOCATIONS OF SURFACE WATER SAMPLING STATIONS


FIGURE-3.12 LOCATIONS OF NOISE SAMPLING STATIONS


FIGURE-3.13 LOCATIONS OF SOIL SAMPLING STATIONS

en-vιsι�n

M/s. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES, GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT 4-1

CHAPTER – 4

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION

MEASURES

4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF IMPACTS Various sources of pollution with respect to wastewater, the flue gas / process emission, hazardous waste

and noise generation along with their qualitative and quantitative analysis as well as measures taken to

control them are discussed herein with details. The network method was adopted to identify potential

impact, which involves understanding of cause-condition-effect relationship between an activity and

environmental parameters. This method involves the "Road Map" type of approach to the identification of

second and third order effect. The basic idea is to account for the project activity and identify the type of

impact that could initially occur followed by the identification of secondary and tertiary impacts.

4.2 PREDICTIONS AND EVALUATION OF IMPACTS Evaluation is an absolute term used for assessment and prediction by means of numerical expression or

value. Assessment is the process of identifying and interpreting the environmental consequences of the

significant actions. Prediction is a way of mapping the environmental consequences of the significant

actions.

Significant Action depicts direct adverse changes caused by the action and its effects on health of biota

including flora, fauna and man, socio-economic conditions, landforms and resources, physical and cultural

heritage properties and quality of bio-physics surrounds.

Prediction requires scientific skill drawn from many disciplines. Prediction of ecological components is

often uncertain, because their response to environmental stress cannot be predicted in absolute terms. The

assessor (one who does the assessment) and decision maker (one who take the decision after adequate

analysis of assessment report) is expected to be aware of the degree of uncertainty. The assessor generally

uses the following methods and resources for impact assessment.

♦ Field surveys and monitoring

♦ Guideline and modeling

♦ Literature surveys and interviews

♦ Qualification and experience

An impact can be defined as any change in Physical, Chemical and Biological, Cultural and Socioeconomic

environment that can be attributed to activities related to alternatives under study for meeting the project

needs. Impact methodology provides an organized approach for prediction and assessing these impacts.

Impact assessment is based on conceptual notions on how the universe acts that is intuitive and/or explicit

assumption concerning the nature of environmental process. In most of cases the predictions consists of

indicating merely whether there will be degradation, no change or enhancement of environment quality. In

other cases, quantitative ranking scales are used. The selection of indicator is crucial in assessment because

impacts are identifies and interpreted based on impact indicator. An impact indicator is a parameter that

provides a measure (in at-least some qualitative or numerical sense) of the significance and magnitude of

the impact. In India indicator is developed by the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) in the form of

primary water quality criteria, biological water quality criteria, and national ambient quality criteria for air

and noise.

The impact of the proposed expansion project on the environment has been considered based on the

information provided by the proponents and data collected from the study area. The environmental impacts

have been categorized as long or short term and reversible or irreversible. Primary impacts are those, which

are attributed directly by the project while secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced. These

typically include the associated investment and changed pattern of social and economical activities by the

proposed action. The operational phase of the proposed project comprises several of which have been

considered to assess the impact on one or another environmental parameters.

en-vιsι�n


Scientific techniques and methodologies based on mathematical modeling are available for studying

impacts of various project activities on environmental parameters.

Minor and temporary impacts are expected due to the construction activities. All the impacts of

construction phase will be short term only and it is very limited as minor construction work is anticipated

for requirement of project.

Operation of the project may potential to affect quality of life, air, noise, water, land, human and flora,

fauna by increase in air, noise and water pollution, by increase in hazardous waste generation, by pollution

from spillage/surface run-off, by disturbance to flora and fauna, by loss of trees resulting from increased

assess, by increase in land values threatening agriculture, etc.

During the operation phase, the following activities are considered as significant impact.

� Air emission

� Noise generation

� Solid/Hazardous waste generation

� Water use and waste water discharge

� Employment Generation

The operation of the project will involve discharge of pollutants. There may be wastewater generation, air

emissions, hazardous waste generation and mechanical noise. An assessment of the quantitative changes in

the various environmental components is therefore essential for predicting the impact. Operational phase

activities will have impacts, either short terms or long term and reversible or irreversible on ambient air and

noise, surface and ground water, land, socio-economics and cultural environment.

4.3 AIR ENVIRONMENT

4.3.1 DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

A. During construction phase Construction phase involves site cleaning, excavation, construction, erection or installation of equipment &

machinery, transportation and material handling. These activities will emit pollutants like dust, PM, SO2

and NOx in to the air environment of the surrounding area. However, these activities will be intermittent

and hence, significant adverse impact is low and for short terms only.

B. During Operation phase:

Major source of air pollution during operation phase are point source i.e. stack attached to boilers, thermic

fluid heater, D. G. Set, Hot air generator and Process vessels and fugitive emission. Details of which are

discussed in following sections.

Details of Point source:

Main pollutants from the stack attached to boilers, hot air generator, thermic fluid heater and D. G. set are

PM, SO2 and NOx, while from stack attached to process vessels is HCl.

Evaluation of Impacts using mathematical model: The impact of the concentration of air pollutants emitted from sources on the study area is evaluated using

the Industrial Source Complex – Short Term (ISCST3) dispersion model, which is a steady-state Gaussian

plume model. It is most widely accepted for its interpretability. It gives reasonably correct values because

this obeys the equation of continuity and it also takes care of diffusion, which is a random process. The

models are typically employed to determine whether the ambient air quality level due to proposed project

will compliance with the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) or not. Over and above

models also serve to assist in the design of effective control strategies to reduce emissions of harmful air

pollutants. For the present study, this model is used for the prediction of maximum ground level

concentration (GLC).

Following are the input data used for the modelling.

1. Micrometeorological Data : Site specific micrometeorological data i.e. ambient temperature, Relative Humidity, wind speed, wind

direction, Cloud Cover, Rainfall, etc. were collected for study area. Details of micrometeorological data is

presented and discussed in section 3.4.1 of Chapter-3.

en-vιsι�n


2. Mixing Height: Mixing Height (MH) is the vertical extent through which the contaminant plume can be mixed. Forecasting

of mixing height is done with the aid of the vertical temperature profile. The MH is a function of stability.

In unstable air the MH is higher and in stable air the MH is lower. With a lower MH, there is a smaller

volume of air in which the pollutant can be dispersed, resulting in higher concentrations in the ambient

environment. There is a seasonal variation of MH. During summer daylight hours, MH can be few thousand

feet whereas for winter it can be a few hundred feet. It varies also in the course of a day. It is lowest at night

and increases during the day. Secondary information has been used to determine the mixing height over the

study region for the study period (October, 2016 to December, 2016) and it varies from 50-2500 meters

(IMD).

3. Stack emission data: Details of proposed stack emission data in terms of stack height, stack diameter, flue/gas exist velocity,

flue/gas exist temperature, pollutant concentration and emission rate used for the modelling purpose are

given in following table-4.1.

TABLE-4.1 DETAILS OF STACK EMISSION DATA

No. Operating

Parameter Unit

Source of Emission (Stack Attached To)

Steam Boiler (Existing +

Proposed)

Thermic Fluid Heater

(Proposed)

Reaction

Vessels

(Proposed)

1. Stack height Meter 30 30 09

2. Stack diameter at top Meter 0.46 1 0.15

3. Flue gas exit velocity m/s 20 3.5 1.5

4. Flue gas temp. K 473 423 333

5. Emission rate:

PM

SO2

NOx

HCl

g/s

g/s

g/s

g/s

0.3244

0.5516

0.2028

-

0.3000

0.5101

0.1875

-

-

-

-

0.0004

6. Emission Conc.: Utility Stacks: PM-150 mg/Nm3, SO2-100 ppm, NOx-50 ppm

Process Stacks: HCl-20 mg/Nm3

4. Model options used for computations:

- The plume rise is estimated by Briggs formulae, but the final rise is always limited to that of the

mixing layer.

- Simple terrain.

- Stack tip down-wash is not considered.

- Buoyancy Induced Dispersion is used to describe the increase in plume dispersion during the

ascension phase.

- Calms processing routine is used by default.

- It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico-chemical transformation and that there

is no pollutant removal by dry deposition.

- Washout by rain is not considered.

- Cartesian co-ordinate system has been used for computations.

5. Model Output (Maximum Ground Level Concentration)

Based on the modelling result under observed meteorological condition, 24 hourly average estimated

maximum GLC along with distance and direction from the project site is presented in table-4.2.

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-4.2 MAXIMUM GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATION OF PM, SO2, NOX & HCl

First Maximum Ground Level Concentration (Avg. 24 Hourly)

Distance & Direction PM

(µµµµg/m3)

SO2

(µµµµg/m3)

NOX

(µµµµg/m3)

HCl

(µµµµg/m3)

1 km in South direction 2.45 4.17 1.53 0.03

First Maximum Ground Level Concentration (Avg. 24 Hourly) at AAQM Locations

No. Monitoring Location Co-ordinates PM

(µµµµg/m3)

SO2

(µµµµg/m3)

NOX

(µµµµg/m3)

HCl

(µµµµg/m3)

1. Project site (A1) (0,0) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0000

2. Bileshvarpura (A2) (3.105, 1.282) 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.0000

3. Irana (A3) (-2.464, 2.564) 0.24 0.41 0.15 0.0018

4. Budasan (A4) (-3.907, 0.240) 1.01 1.72 0.63 0.0035

5. Rajpur (A5) (-0.541, 4.809) 0.07 0.13 0.05 0.0001

6. Achrasan (A6) (-0.981, -1.803) 0.51 0.86 0.32 0.0041

7. Lunasan (A7) (1.903, -2.845) 0.04 0.07 0.02 0.0000

8. Chhatral city (A8) (3.096, -0.769) 0.06 0.11 0.06 0.0001

The spatial distribution of ground level incremental concentrations of pollutants due to proposed project

operation on the impact zone area of 10 km x 10 km on modelling grid size of 1000 m x 1000 m around the

proposed site is shown in figures-4.1 to 4.6 respectively.

The predicted ground level concentration of pollutants is given in the table-4.3, along with resultant

concentration at the monitoring location around the project site.

Modelling result envisages that incremental ground level concentrations of pollutants due to operation of

proposed project during the operation phase are negligible and will remain within National Ambient Air

Quality Standards published by MoEFCC, New Delhi vide G.S.R. 826 (E), dated 16/11/2009. Hence there

will be no significant impact on the air environment.

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-4.1 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE PM CONC. (µg/m3)

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-4.2 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE SO2 CONC. (µg/m3)

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-4.3 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE NOx CONC. (µg/m3)

en-vιsι�n


FIGURE-4.4 SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION OF 24-HOUR AVERAGE HCl CONC. (µg/m3)

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-4.3 SUMMARY OF ISCST3 MODEL OUTPUT FOR POLLUTANTS

Pollutants Monitoring

Location Concentration (µµµµg/m

3) NAAQM

Standard Baseline Incremental Resultant

Particulate Matter,

Size less than

10 µm (PM10)

Project site (A1) 71.52 0.00 71.52

100 µg/m3

Bileshvarpura (A2) 71.85 0.01 71.86

Irana (A3) 66.85 0.24 67.09

Budasan (A4) 72.57 1.01 73.58

Rajpur (A5) 65.77 0.07 65.84

Achrasan (A6) 70.23 0.51 70.74

Lunasan (A7) 62.79 0.04 62.83

Chhatral city (A8) 72.86 0.06 72.92

Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2)

Project site (A1) 13.91 0.00 13.91

80 µg/m3


Irana (A3) 10.79 0.41 11.2

Budasan (A4) 13.50 1.72 15.22

Rajpur (A5) 9.26 0.13 9.39

Achrasan (A6) 11.42 0.86 12.28

Lunasan (A7) 10.54 0.07 10.61

Chhatral city (A8) 9.42 0.11 9.53

Nitrogen Oxide

(NOx)

Project site (A1) 22.43 0.00 22.43

80 µg/m3


Irana (A3) 18.94 0.15 19.09

Budasan (A4) 20.97 0.63 21.6

Rajpur (A5) 19.81 0.05 19.86

Achrasan (A6) 21.73 0.32 22.05

Lunasan (A7) 17.89 0.02 17.91

Chhatral city (A8) 20.00 0.06 20.06

Hydrochloric

Acid (HCl)

Project site (A1)

<1.0

0.0000

<1.0 -

Bileshvarpura (A2) 0.0000

Irana (A3) 0.0018

Budasan (A4) 0.0035

Rajpur (A5) 0.0001

Achrasan (A6) 0.0041

Lunasan (A7) 0.0000

Chhatral city (A8) 0.0001

Details of fugitive emission: Looking to nature of the proposed project it may generate fugitive emissions. Sources of fugitive emissions

include storage of chemicals, manufacturing activities, solvent handling, processing vessels, valves, joints,

loading and unloading section, raw material handling and hazardous waste storage area, etc. Fugitive

emissions will be in a small quantity but it gives continuous exposure to the workers.

4.3.2 MITIGATION MEASURES

To control stack emission:

Following are the mitigation measures proposed to control air emission from stack

- Wood Waste/ Agro waste as fuel is being used in existing boiler and Coal/ Agro waste as fuel will be

used for proposed boiler. Multi cyclone separator will be provided for common stack to control air

emission.

- Coal as fuel will be used in Thermic Fluid Heater, Multi cyclone separator will be provided to control

air emission.

- To control process emission from two stacks attached to two and four process vessels respectively,

Water scrubber followed by Alkali Scrubber will be provided.

- Diesel as a fuel will be used in D.G. Set, Acoustic Enclosure with adequate stack height will be

provided.

en-vιsι�n


- D. G. Set will be operated only during power failure.

- Stack monitoring facility will be provided to all the stacks for regular monitoring.

To control fugitive emission: Following are the mitigation measured proposed to control fugitive emission from the proposed project.

- Mechanical seals in pumps, compressors, treatment vessels, distillation vessels shall be used and

maintained periodically.

- LDAR programme will be implemented and followed for detection and control of fugitive emission of

gases from process.

- Closed unloading, conveying and packing system shall be provided.

- More weightage on selection of MOC of piping shall be given to avoid leakage/spillage.

- Safety devices shall be provided to workers working near the reactors.

- Drip tray will be placed for each pump to collect leakages and spillages.

- Breather valves, PSVs, Rupture disc, Vapor recovery system will be installed for process/storage tank

vents

- Proper Control of the operating parameters, mainly temperature, vacuums, cooling media circulation,

during plant operation and solvent recovery

- Regular monitoring of VOC concentration in work zone.

- Greenbelt will be developed around the plant to arrest the fugitive emission.

4.4 WATER ENVIRONMENT With respect to water environment three aspects are generally considered in EIA, the raw water availability,

consumption and wastewater generation. The first priority in water quality assessment is to maintain and

restore the desirable level of water quality in general.

4.4.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES During Construction, drainage pattern and water supply system of overland water flow will be somewhat

changed due to the site preparation activities.

The local labor force will be deployed during construction phase and no colony is proposed as the workers

will be employed from the nearby local village. During the construction phase of the project, water

requirement will be mainly for construction activities, growing plants, etc. As construction labour will be

from local area, minor quantity of domestic water will be required. So domestic wastewater generation will

be negligible, it shall not contaminate the ground water or surface water in the nearby areas.

4.4.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES Water requirement shall be fulfilling through ground water. Daily water requirement for the existing project

is 14.1 KLD, which will be increased up to 60 KLD due to proposed expansion project. Major portion of

the study area is falls in semi-critical zone and rest in over exploited zone as classified by Central Ground

Water Authority (CGWA). Project location is falls in over exploited zone and hence water withdrawal from

ground will have significant impact on ground water availability. To reduce the impact recharging ground

water through rain water harvesting within premises and nearby villages is proposed.

To maintain balance of ground water, company will construct rain water harvesting structure i.e. recharge

well to recharge ground water and storage of rain water for future use as per norms specified by CGWA.

There may be risk of ground water and surface water contamination due to wastewater generation and

handling from the industrial activities like process, washing, cooling and boiler. Around 31.3 KLD waste

water will be generated after proposed expansion project. Domestic waste water around 3.65 KLD will be

treated and disposed off through septic tank/well. While industrial waste water around 28 KLD will be

segregated into two streams, concentrated and diluted. Concentrated stream will be sent for common MEE

facility and diluted effluent will be treated in ETP after that it will be evaporated through single stage

evaporator. Detailed description of effluent treatment scheme is discussed in chapter-2.

4.5 SOIL ENVIRONMENT

The main source of impact on land and soil environment will be due to solid waste generated during

construction and operation activities. In addition to this accidental spillage of chemicals and effluent can

also degrade the soil environment.

en-vιsι�n


4.5.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES The proposed project activities will be located on flat terrain no significant topographical change is

expected due to construction activities. The construction of building will help in fixation of soil, thereby

reducing the soil erosion. Some construction operations shall disturb the soil profile, but the impact will be

insignificant. There will be no change in existing land use pattern, forest cover or vegetation in surrounding

area. During the construction phase, various types of solid waste generated which will affect the site, all

wastes from the site will be cleared with due care.

During the construction activity, municipal waste will be generated in minor quantity as local construction

workers will get employed and no construction camp is proposed. The generated waste will be collected,

segregated and will be disposed off suitably. Hence impacts will be insignificant, reversible and for short

duration only. These impacts will be confined to the construction site only and no adverse impact on the

surroundings environment is anticipated.

4.5.2 OPERATION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES Due to proposed project, hazardous/solid waste generation there will be increased. Details of existing and

proposed hazardous/solid waste generation are discussed in chapter-2.

All solid/hazardous waste will be stored separately in designated area within the premises. Hazardous waste

generation due to proposed expansion project will be mainly ETP sludge, used oil, Discarded Containers/

Barrels/plastic, Date Expired, discard and off specification medicines and Fly Ash. These all waste will be

collected, storage designated area and disposed as per Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. Membership of authorized common TSDF, MEE and incineration

site will be obtained.

There will be risk of Soil contamination due to spillage of hazardous chemicals, solid/hazardous waste and

liquid effluent during handling. To mitigate that proper handling of chemicals and hazardous waste will be

done. In case of any spillage entire contaminated soil will be removed and disposed to secured landfill site.

Hence, no adverse impact on soil environment due to the proposed project activities is envisaged.

4.6 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

4.6.1 DETAILS OF NOISE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS The assessment of the impacts of noise on the surrounding community depends upon:

• Characteristics of noise source (instantaneous, intermittent, or continuous in nature)

• Time of day at which noise occurs

• Location of noise source with respect to noise receptor

For an approximate estimation of propagation of noise in the ambient air from the area or point source, a

standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation used is as follows:

Noise (Receptor) = Noise (Source) - 20 Log [distance (Receptor) / distance (Source)]

4.6.2 CONSTRUCTION PHASE IMPACTS Construction will be carried out within premises, so not more than industrial plant construction activities

would be carried out. Like admin building, security, parking etc will not be constructed. Only Some new

plant machinery will be installed for that construction work will be carried out, which will be for short

period. Noise will be increased for the short period.

1. Vehicular movement for construction material transportation.

2. Operation of construction machineries

So impact of construction activities on noise environment will be too much localized. Near to that factory

premises no other habitation or industry so no outsiders of the company will get affected due to noise

pollution. Workers near to high noise area will be provided PPEs.

4.6.3 OPERATION PHASE IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES

During operation phase of proposed plant prime noise emission will be expected from industrial activities

like diesel generator, mechanical movement, boiler operation and material handling. Noise emission level

from these sources will be expected to keep remain below the permissible limit. However, at places where

en-vιsι�n


noise levels may exceed the permissible limit, acoustic enclosure will be provided (e.g. D.G. Set). Noise

protection equipment will be provided to workers where high occupationally noise exposure limit

envisaged. Greenbelt will be developed around the periphery of the plant to mitigate the noise levels on the

ambient environment.

4.6.4 IMPACT OF THE TRANSPORTATION Total 80 numbers of trucks will be required for the transportation of raw material, finished goods and

wastes after proposed expansion. Major impact on surrounding environment of this transportation will be

mainly increase in noise and vibration, dust, carbon monoxide, etc. There is no alternative option available

for transportation of goods other than road due to site location. And road way is feasible and easy as per

location because GIDC corridor and connected to Kadi and Kalol GIDC. Nearest railway station and airport

is Kalol and Ahmedabad which is around 10 km and 32 km away respectively from the site.

4.7 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES FOR

LAND USE

4.7.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT

To identify impact on land use of the project considering various environmental impacts, social, ecological

impacts during construction and operation phases. The corresponding mitigation measures to take care of

the adverse impacts are also discussed in following sections.

4.7.2 IMPACT OF LAND USE

� Total land area of the project site is 7,066 m2 & space for the proposed expansion project will be

utilized from available open land.

� Point to be noted that project site is situated in Kalol Taluka of Gandhinagar district and the project

site is near to the district border of Gandhinagar and Mahesana, other Industries also can be found

within the study area which will be cumulatively effect the environment, majorly chemical industries.

� Chhtral, Kalol and Kadi are major settlement along with other smaller settlements could be affected

due to air pollution, respiratory diseases.

4.7.3 MITIGATION MEASURES OF LAND USE � Seepages, percolation of project site water of the site need to be strictly controlled through

constructions of peripheral the wall around the site.

� All effluents whenever other pollutants must be controlled in such away leakage / seepage within the

project premises or within the study area.

� As project site should develop proper green belt according to requirement of CPCB norms.

� Protection & Conservation measures for crop lands should take by the industries.

4.8 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT The impact due to construction phase and operation phase of the project and its activities on the ecological

parameters like natural vegetation, cropping pattern, fisheries and aquatic life, forests and species diversity.

There is no any sanctuary, reserve forest and national park within the 10 km area from the proposed

expansion project site. Proposed expansion project will be carried out in already acquired existing land.

vegetation will not be cleared. Chances of adverse effect on ecology may be occurred due to air pollution

caused by flue gases emission and process emission. However, unit has proposed adequate environmental

management systems and the same will be efficiently operated during the operation of project. Regular

monitoring of various parameters will be carried out. Thus, there will not be any adverse impact will be

occurred on surrounding ecology. Greenbelt development will have positive impact on flora and fauna.

4.8.1 NATURAL VEGETATION Industry will develop a green belt on the surrounding periphery. Since the effluents and emissions

generated from the project activities shall be treated and disposed as per the EMP provisions, adverse

impact over any of the ecological components of the environment is reduced to minimum.

4.8.2 CROPS

The proposed expansion shall not alter the crop production of the area. The area is having cropping lands.

Further, the necessary environmental protection measures have been planned under EMP e.g. air pollution

control systems shall be designed to take care of even emergency releases of the gaseous pollutants like

en-vιsι�n


Particulate Matter, SO2, and NOx. Regular environmental surveillance shall be done for the unit, so as not

to have any short-term or cumulative effect on the crops and the natural vegetation of the area.

4.8.3 FOREST, NATIONAL PARKS / SANCTUARIES There is no reserved forest, national park or sanctuary within 10 km radius of the plant. There shall be no

impact on the same.

4.9 IMPACT ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECTS Every development brings destruction with it, anticipated impacts and mitigations are presented here:

NEGATIVE IMPACTS � Culture: The proposed expansion project will require additional manpower around 100 (19 existing

and 81 proposed). The proposed expansion project will increase the migration of skilled personnel.

Additional 81 manpower are required and due to this behavior, living style, etc. of local people will

change through multi-cultural. Hence, Cultural impact is envisaged.

� Environmental impact: Migration may bring mental health problems. Chemical exposure during

production activities may have some adverse impact on human health in the long run like skin

irritation, dermatitis, erythema, and scaling, eye irritation, irritation of the respiratory tract and affect

respiration.

POSITIVE IMPACTS � Employment generation: The Company recruits local people as far as possible to generate

employment in local area, it will increase socio-economic status of the local society, the requirement

of around additional 81 personnel as direct manpower will enhance standard of living of families.

During construction period employment will be generated especially for local people. The

employment opportunity created will serve as a tool for reduction of poverty.

� Enhance Socio- economic status: This project will bring social change in the society with

improved socio-economic life of the local people; this project will also generate indirect

employment, like primary grocery requirements of residential, functional shopping, entertainment

facilities, better transportation facility etc.

� Rural Development: Nearby villages will get developed through CSR activities of the company.

Education level will also improve among the people of local area because of two reasons, one is

company will promote education under its CSR activities and secondly requirement of eligible

employees for the company so students will get motivated for higher education.

4.10 PLACES OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL/HISTORICAL/RELIGIOUS/TOURIST INTEREST There is no place of archaeological, historical, religious or tourist interest within the study area i.e. 10 km

radius of plant site. Hence, there shall be no impact on places of interest.

4.11 ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD Raw material and finish products shall be transported by road and shall be stored in the plant premises.

Onsite and offsite emergency plan shall be prepared for storage and handling of materials and finished

goods. This report shall be prepared with the consideration of hazards associated with the materials and care

should be taken for all aspects of environmental hazards. The project proponent shall consider all the safety

aspects in planning, designing and operation of the plant as per standard practices. Hence, no adverse

impact on this account is anticipated.

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-4.4 POTENTIAL IMPACTS & MITIGATIVE MEASURES

Environmental

Components Potential Impacts

Potential Source of

Impact

Controls Through EMP &

Design Impact Evaluation Remedial Measures

Water Quality Deterioration of water

quality

Decrease in water

availability

Construction activity:

Withdrawal of water for

construction activity and

domestic use for

construction workers.

Operation Activity:

Water withdrawal for

industrial use and domestic

use.

Proper management of surface

water runoff shall be made.

Effluent treatment plant (ETP) for

treatment of waste water.

Rain water harvesting

Green belt development

Insignificant adverse impact

Low COD effluent will be

evaporated after treated in

ETP and High COD stream

will be sent to Common

MEE for further treatment

with utmost care.

Air Quality Emissions of dust, PM,

SO2 and NOx

Construction Phase: All heavy construction

activities. Transportation of

materials.

Operation Phase:

Due to transportation of

raw material, wasters and

products.

Suitable control measures will be

adopted as per a dust control plan

and closed vehicles will be used.

Water will be sprinkled on loose

top soil.

Closed system adopted, due care

handling of chemicals

Not significant because dust

generation will be

temporary and will settle

fast due to dust suppression

techniques used

During construction Phase

the contractors are advised

to use dust masks for the

employed labour.

Water sprinkling for

suppression of dust during

construction phase.

Emissions of PM, SO2,

NOx and HCl

Operation Phase:

Emissions from the stack

attached to steam boiler,

Hot air generator, Thermic

fluid heater and D.G.Set

Emissions of HCl from

stacks attached to process

vents.

Adequate stack height

Water scrubber followed by Alkali

Scrubber attached to process stack

Green belt to be provided with

specific species reducing PM

levels.

Not significant impact

Efficiency of air pollution

control equipment will be

checked on regular

intervals.

Socio-Economic Overall growth &

development of area,

increased primary &

secondary employment,

improvement in

infrastructure and growth

of other industries

Project activities CSR activity is proposed Beneficial change Preference to local people

for employment

en-vιsι�n


Environmental

Components Potential Impacts

Potential Source of

Impact

Controls Through EMP &

Design Impact Evaluation Remedial Measures

Terrestrial Ecology Minor loss of habitat-flora

& fauna

Project activities Green belt, Proper management of

solid waste and liquid effluent

In-significant Impact -

Noise Environment

Noise emissions

Construction Phase:

Operation of construction

equipment and vehicles

during site development.

Use of well-maintained equipment

fitted with silencers.

Providing noise shields near the

heavy construction operations

Construction activity will be

limited to daytime hours only.

Residential areas are

located more than 800 m

away from the site and

hence there is no noise

increase expected from the

project activities. Also,

there are no sensitive

receptors located within

near vicinity of site.

Use of Personal Protective

Equipment (PPE) like

earmuffs and earplug during

construction activities.

Operation Phase:

Process activity area

Loading and unloading

area.

Green Belt Development

Providing acoustic enclosures In-significant

Short-term exposure within

permissible limit.

-

Infrastructure &

Services

Improved communication,

transport, housing,

educational & medical

facilities

Social activities of

company

Development has been gradual Beneficial impact -

Environmental

Hazards

Risk to environment &

neighboring population

Storage of materials On site & off site Disaster

management plan & Safe practices

Insignificant adverse impact Proper storage and handling

of materials

en-vιsι�n


4.12 MATRIX REPRESENTATION

The parameters discussed are presented in the form of a matrix in table-4.5. The impact matrix relating to

the activities during construction and operation phase is presented.

The quantification of impact is done using numerical scores 0 to 5 as per the following criteria.

Score Severity criteria

0 No impact

1 No damage

2 Slight/ Short-term effect

3 Occasional reversible effect

4 Irreversible/ Long-term effect

5 Permanent damage

The scores for various parameters and activities are presented in table-4.5. Score of environmental impact

matrix are given in table-4.6.

4.12.1 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART

The total negative impact of various activities on any one parameter is represented as a cumulative score

and the cumulative scores of various parameters are given in the form of a cumulative impact chart

presented in table-4.7. Any particular parameter having an individual score greater than 4 or cumulative

score of 20 implies serious effects due to the project and calls for suitable mitigation measures.

It is evident from the matrices that the resultant impact is beneficial to the local population and due to

export (and import substitution) the resultant impact is beneficial to our country.

TABLE-4.5 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION MATRIX

Activities During

Operation Phase

Air

Quality Noise

Water

Qualit

y

Land

Requi-

rement

& Land

use

Infrast-

ructure

Env.

Hazar

ds

Terres-

trial &

Aquatic

Ecology

Socio-

Econom

ic

Status

Re-

source

Deplet

ion

Odor

Resource

Consumption �� - �� - �� -

Material & goods

Storage/handling �� - �� - - - ��

Utilities �� - �� - �� -

Gaseous Emissions �� - - - - �� - ��

Fugitive Emissions �� - - - - �� - - ��

Solid & Hazardous

Waste Disposal �� - - �� - - - ��

Spills & Leaks �� - �� - - �� - - - ��

Shutdown/ Startup �� - - - - ��

Equipment Failures �� - - �� - - ��

Plant Operations �� - ��

Transportation �� - - �� - - - -

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-4.6 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT MATRIX

Activities During

Operation Phase

Air

Quality Noise

Water

Qualit

y

Land

Requi-

rement

& Land

use

Infrast-

ructure

Env.

Hazar

ds

Terres-

trial &

Aquatic

Ecology

Socio-

Econom

ic

Status

Re-

source

Deple-

tion

Odor

Resource

Consumption 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 1 3 0

Material & goods

Storage/handling 1 2 0 2 2 1 0 0 0 1

Utilities 2 2 2 1 0 2 0 1 2 0

Gaseous Emissions 3 0 0 0 0 2 2 1 0 1

Fugitive Emissions 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Solid & Hazardous

Waste Disposal 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

Spills & Leaks 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

Shutdown/ Startup 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 1

Equipment Failures 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Plant Operations 2 2 3 0 2 1 1 1 3 1

Transportation 2 2 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0

TABLE-4.7 CUMULATIVE IMPACT CHART

Environmental Parameter Total Cumulative Score

Air Quality 17

Noise 10

Water Quality 11

Land Requirement and Landuse 05

Infrastructure 08

Environmental Hazards 13

Terrestrial Aquatic Ecology 06

Socio Economic Status 06

Resource Depletion 09

Odor 08

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 5

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

5.1 ALTERNATIVES OF TECHNOLOGY For the proposed range of products, M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories will use chemical synthesis

methodology. All the products are well established in scientific forum of world chemical association. M/s.

Orbit Pharma Laboratories will increase the efficiency of chemical synthesis, by providing proper working

conditions & industrial equipments.

5.2 ALTERNATIVES OF SITE

5.2.1 DESCRIPTION

• The market of Pharmaceutical Industry has fast progressing growth and there is ample opportunity

in indigenous as well as export market.

• Management of M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories has decided to come up with the new family of

products.

• Site selection for a project is a critical decision made by management that significantly affects their

profit and loss. Decisions regarding the locations of industrial facilities influence where people

work, live, and determine the life-style of a community.

• For the expansion of unit, company has two options,

1. Purchase a new site.

2. Establish a new unit in existing premises.

After considering adverse impact & their mitigation measures for both options, Final selection of site has

been made.

5.2.2 IDENTIFICATION OF ADVERSE IMPACT

(1) If company will purchase a new site 1. Enormous increase in the capital cost of the project, if land possession cost is high.

2. Water, power, raw materials, transportation and skilled labour should not be cost effective.

If the site is not selected properly, it will adversely impact the project in above area.

(2) If company will establish a new unit in existing premises 1. Pollution load will be increased at existing site.

2. Fresh water requirement will be increased, thus additional burden on water source will take place.

3. More transportation will take place that will increase the traffic density of that specific region.

5.2.3 MITIGATION MEASURES

(1) If company will purchase a new site 1. New site should be available within budget.

2. Site should be very well connected with road/rail for the ease of transport, with all the infrastructure

facilities like availability of water, power etc.

3. Availability of man power should be there.

(2) If company will establish a new unit in existing premises 1. Proper mitigation measures to control Air, Water & Noise pollution will be provided.

2. Existing site has all the infrastructure facilities including broad roads, so that connectivity of

transportation etc will easily take place.

3. Existing experience of handling raw material, plots, manpower can be a good concept for proposed

expansion.

5.2.4 SELECTION OF SITE The project is having its pharmaceutical unit at the same location which is going for expansion.

• All administration will be done from one stage and common facilities will have cost reduction.

• Infrastructural facilities are available for the ease of project

en-vιsι�n


• Easy availability of fuel, water, power, manpower, raw material, etc.

• No national park or wildlife habitats fall within 10 km radial distance from proposed project site.

• Hazardous waste disposal site is nearer to the project site.

Therefore, selected site is having positive benefit for the resin manufacturing unit.

So, the second option of establishing a new unit in existing premises is more convenient then to purchase a

new site for the proposed project.

5.3 NO PROJECT ALTERNATIVE

There is no alternatives to this project is thought of. Experience of handling similar operation of same site

will anyway lead to better management of operations and an environment sound operational practice.

Further the products listed are coming under life saving drugs and their production at our country will

reduce the import of drugs and will increase the availability in market and hence ensuring cost control on

similar products.

Moreover, such projects increase resource utilizations by creating more employment and hence contributing

to the nation’s economic growth.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 6

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.1 INTRODUCTION

Environmental monitoring provides feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a project.

Monitoring results help judge the success of mitigation measures in protecting the environment. They are

also used to ensure compliance with environmental standards, and to facilitate any needed project design or

operational changes.

An environmental monitoring program is important as it provides useful information and helps to:

� Assist in detecting the development of any unwanted environmental situation, and thus, provides

opportunities for adopting appropriate control measures, and

� Define the responsibilities of the project proponents, contractors and environmental monitors and

provides means of effectively communicating environmental issues among them.

� Define monitoring mechanism and identify monitoring parameters.

� Evaluate the performance and effectiveness of mitigation measures proposed in the Environmental

Management Plan (EMP) and suggest improvements in management plan, if required.

� Find out pollution level inside the plant and in nearby area.

� Compile pollution related data for remedial measures.

� Find out efficiency level of pollution control measures adopted.

6.2 MONITORING SCHEDULE DURING OPERATION PHASE Environmental monitoring program is a vital process of any management plan of the development project.

This helps in assessing the potential problems that result from the proposed expansion project, changes in

environmental conditions and effectiveness of implemented mitigation measures.

Regular monitoring in a systematic and standardized manner helps in assessment of current environment

and provides information on operational performance of installed pollution control facilities. Proposed

schedule of environmental monitoring for the proposed project is given in following table-6.1 which will be

carried out by third party.

TABLE-6.1 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

No. Area of

Monitoring Sampling Locations Parameters to be Analyzed

Frequency of

Sampling

Air Pollution Monitoring

1. Stack Emission Each utility stack PM, SO2, NOx, HCl Once in a month

2. Ambient Air

Quality Three samples

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, VOC,

CO, HCl Once in six month

3. Work Zone

Environment Within premises VOC Once in a year

Water Pollution Monitoring

4. Waste water Inlet and outlet of Effluent

treatment plant

pH, BOD, COD, TSS

As per consent of PCB

Continuous

Once in a month

5. Ground and

surface water Two sampling locations As per IS Standards Once in a year

Soil Pollution Monitoring

6. Soil Two sampling locations of

Impact Area As per consent of PCB Once in year

Noise Pollution Monitoring

7. Noise Noise generating units Sound Pressure Levels (Leq) Once in a month

within Plant Sound Pressure Levels (Leq) Once in a month

en-vιsι�n


No. Area of

Monitoring Sampling Locations Parameters to be Analyzed

Frequency of

Sampling

8.

Occupational

Health

Monitoring

Pre-employment Check up Vision, Audiometry, Spirometry,

Chest Skiagram, Urine, RBCs,

etc.

Once after

appointment

Periodical Check up Spirometry, Urine, RBCs,

Anemia, etc.

<30 yrs. Once in five

years

31-40 yrs. Once in

four years

41-50 yrs. Once in

two years

Above >50 yrs. once

every year

Post employment check up Vision, Audiometry, Spirometry,

Chest Skiagram, Urine, RBCs,

etc.

Once before relief

6.3 WORK ZONE MONITORING FOR HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS Work zone monitoring for hazardous chemicals will be carried out by third party NABL/MoEF&CC authorized

laboratory. Sampling locations will be identified for the air borne concentration of hazardous chemicals.

Monitoring will be carried out and records shall be kept as per Gujarat Factories Rules (GFR). List of some

hazardous chemicals being used and going to be used are given as follows:

Toluene, Chloro Acetyle Chloride, Acetic acid, Diethyle Amine, HCl, Acetone, Hydrogen Peroxide, IPA, MDC etc.


CHAPTER – 7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION/HEARING

Public consultation is applicable for the proposed project as per Para 7(i) III (b) of EIA Notification, 14th

September, 2006 as the project is located outside the notified industrial area. Details of the Public

consultation/hearing will be incorporated after completion of public hearing.

7.2 RISK ASSESSMENT

7.2.1 INTRODUCTION

Industrial activities including production, storage, handling, transportation and operational practices

presents levels of hazards to workforce, population and environment at large due to accidents, spills, leaks

etc. These accidents results in personal and financial loss. The assessment of the threat posed, its control

and prevention through good design, management and operational controls is of primal importance.

Events like the Bhopal tragedy have emphasized the need to address both on-site and off-site safety. It is

against this background that the various Section and Rules under the Environment Protection Act, 1986, the

Factories Act, 1948 and other Acts specify the requirements for a safe and reliable working of an industry.

These require carrying out various studies and analysis to assess and mitigate hazards prevalent in the

factory in line with the goal of safe and reliable working. These are more commonly known as “Risk

Assessment Studies”. Risk assessment refers to the technical, scientific assessment of the nature and

magnitude of risk and uses a factual base to define the health effects of exposure of individuals or

populations or ecological receptors to hazardous contaminants and situations.

The QRA report signifies that trained & skilled employees and supporting services can achieve improved

safety & productivity levels. Together they can also achieve low maintenance cost, optimized use of Raw

materials and negligible rejections/ wastes.

The project is advised to equip with a well planned Disaster Management Plan as an essential Mitigation

Control Measure.

Substantial information is given in the chapter PREVENTIVE MEASURES of QRA, for choosing Plant

and Equipment which will ensure PRODUCT SAFETY.

A good Legal & Regulatory Compliance Register shall be planned and be in place. All the Rules and

Regulations of the land shall be strictly followed to achieve a hindrance free operation of the plant from the

statutory point of view.

A good safety Manual shall be planned and be in place. All the requirements of Safety & Health of the

operating plant shall be an essential part of the manual. The Safety manual will serve as a good

communication medium to the employees of the plant. The systems to be complied by the operating level

employees as part of their responsibilities and the operational requirements of the system will be readily

available in the manual.

Risk Assessment study includes predictions of the WORST-CASE SCENARIO (catastrophic failure) and

MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO along with damage distances and preparedness plan for

effectively combating such situations. The report also discusses and demarcates the vulnerable zones and a

detailed fire control plan for flammable substances.

No plan is complete or total of its requirements and its scope of improvement is a continuous process.

Hence, the RISK ASSESSMENT REPORT is to be reviewed and updated as and when:

• any expansion, alteration, or extension of the plant is planned / implemented

• an incident has occurred and been dealt with, based on feedback gathered on any shortcomings in

the handling of the situation

• any feedback is received from the users of the report

Risk Assessment is therefore defined as a continuous and integrated process of identification, evaluation,

and measurement of risks, along with their potential impact on the organization.


The benefits of risk assessment include the following:

• Mitigation or reduction of the risk of an incident.

• Mitigation of the severity and/or consequences by way of improved process techniques, fire

protection systems, arrangements of storage, inventory monitoring to fit production requirements.

• Confidence building in employees by improving competency.

Preparedness and prompt response to deal with any accident

7.2.2 DETAILS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESS

Detail of manufacturing operation is given in section 2.7.4 of chapter-2.

7.2.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

The details of storage and handling of hazardous chemicals are listed in table-7.1. This list also contains the

hazardous characteristics of each Raw material. Permission for the storage of Methanol, Toluene and

Acetone, etc. will be obtained from PESO (Petroleum & Explosives Safety Organization), Nagpur, if

applicable.

TABLE-7.1 HAZARDOUS CHARACTERISTICS & STORAGE OF RAW MATERIALS

No.

Name of the

Hazardous

Substance

CAS No. State

No. of tank

/drums

/bags/carboys

Quantity

Stored

Place of its

Storage

Possible

type

of Hazards

1. 2,6-Dichlorophenol 87-65-0 Solid 93 nos. Drum 23.25 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

2. Potassium Carbonate 584-08-7 Solid 417 nos. Bag 10.425 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

3. Toluene 108-88-3 Liquid 1 nos 16 KL Tank 16 KM Tank Farm Area Toxic & Fire

4. MMCA 96-34-4 Liquid 65 nos. Drum 16.25 KL Liquid RM Store Fire & Toxic

5. Aniline Oil 62-53-3 Liquid 1 nos. 20 KL

Tank

20 KL Tank Farm Area Fire & Toxic

6. Sodium methoxide 124-41-4 Liquid 1 nos 20 KL Tank 20 KL Tank Farm Area Toxic, Fire

& Reactive

7. Chloro Acetyle

Chloride

79-04-9 Liquid 84 nos. Drum 21 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic

8. Alluminium Chloride 7446-70-0 Solid 403 nos. Bag 10.075 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

9. Caustic Soda 1310-73-2 Solid 105 nos. Bag 5.25 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

10. Carbon 7440-44-0 Solid 30 nos. Bag 0.9 MT Solid RM Store Fire

11. Diclofence Sodium 15307-79-6 Solid 22 nos. Bag 0.55 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

12. Acetic acid 64-19-7 Liquid 1 nos 20 KL Tank 20 KL Tank Farm Area Toxic

13. Diethyle Amine 109-89-7 Liquid 3 nos. Drum 0.69 KL Liquid RM Store Fire & Toxic

14. Hydrochloric Acid 7647-01-0 Liquid 18 nos. Drum 3.6 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic

15. 4 Chloro-2

Aminophenol

95-85-2 Solid 55 nos. Bag 1.375 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

16. Technical Grade

Urea

57-13-6 Solid 33 nos. Bag 1.65 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

17. Hydro Sulphide of

Soda

7775-14-6 Solid 1 nos. Bag 50 KG Solid RM Store Fire, Toxic

18. Caustic Lye 1310-73-2 Liquid 1 nos 10 KL Tank 10 KL Tank Farm Area Toxic

19. Methenol 67-56-1 Liquid 2 no., 20 KL 40 KL Tank Farm Area Fire, Toxic

20. 4-Chloro-2- Nitro

Aniline

89-63-4 Solid 163 nos. Bag 4.075 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

21. Thiophenol 108-98-5 Liquid 18 nos. Drum 3.6 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic, Fire

22. Forous Chloride 13478-10-9 Solid 15 nos. Bag 0.375 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

23. Hydrazine Hydride 7803-57-8 Liquid 24 nos. Drum 4.8 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic, Fire

24. Hydrogen Cynamide 420-04-2 Solid 17 nos. Drum 3.74 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

25. Methyl Formate 107-31-3 Liquid 10 nos. Drum 2 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

26. Fenbendazole 43210-67-9 Solid 49 nos. Drum 1.225 MT Solid RM Store Fire, Toxic


No.

Name of the

Hazardous

Substance

CAS No. State

No. of tank

/drums

/bags/carboys

Quantity

Stored

Place of its

Storage

Possible

type

of Hazards

27. Dimethyle Sulxoxide 67-68-5 Liquid 3 nos. Drum 0.63 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

28. Hydrogen Peroxide 7722-84-1 Liquid 27 Nos. Carboys 0.81 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic

29. Acetone 67-64-1 Liquid 1 no., 20 KL 20 KL Tank Farm Area Fire, Toxic

30. N(4-5) Dicloro-2

Nitro Phenyle

Acetamide

5462-30-6 Solid 12 nos. Drum 2.4 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

31. DMF 68-12-2 Liquid 4 nos. Drum 0.8 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

32. 2:3 Dichloro Phenol 576-24-9 Solid 2 nos. Drum 0.5 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

33. Nitrogen Gas 576-24-9 Gas 2 nos. Cylinder 0.1 kg RM Store Toxic

34. Hydrogen Gas 1333-74-0 Gas 3 nos. Cylinder 0.15 kg RM Store Fire

35. Rancynickel - Solid 9 nos. Drum 45 KG Solid RM Store Fire, Toxic

36. Hyflow 68855-54-9 Solid 1 nos. Bag 50 KG Solid RM Store -

37. Potassium Hydroxide 1310-58-3 Solid 12 nos. Bag 0.6 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

38. Calcium Disulphide 20548-54-3 Solid 6 nos. Bag 0.3 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

39. Dimethyle Sulphate 77-78-1 Liquid 3 nos. Drum 0.75 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic, Fire

40. IPA 67-63-0 Liquid 1 nos. Drum 0.2 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

41. 2 Nitro-5(Phenylethio

Aniline)

43156-47-

44

Solid 2 nos. Drum 0.4 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

42. Methoxy Acetyl

Chloride

38870-89-2 Liquid 6 nos. Drum 0.6 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

43. Methylene Dichloride 75-09-2 Liquid 19 nos. Drum 3.8 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic, Fire

44. Xylene 1330-20-7 Liquid 10 nos. Drum 2 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

45. Thiour 62-56-6 Solid 1 nos. Drum 0.1 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

46. Decyl bromide 112-29-8 Liquid 6 nos. Drum 0.3 KL Liquid RM Store

47. Methychloro Formate 79-22-1 Liquid 2 nos. Drum 0.4 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

48. 1-1 Cyclohexane

Diacetic Acid

99189-60-3 Liquid 2 nos. Drum 0.4 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic, Fire

49. Bromine 7726-95-6 Liquid 3 nos. Drum 0.3 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic

50. Caustic Flakes 1310-73-2 Solid 79 nos. Bag 3.95 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

51. Trietylamine 121-44-8 Liquid 1 nos. Drum 0.2 KL Liquid RM Store Fire, Toxic

52. 1,3 Cyclohexadione 504-02-9 Solid 10 nos. Bag 0.5 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

53. Phenyl Hydrazine 100-63-0 Liquid 3 nos. Drum 0.6 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic, Fire

54. Zinc Chloride 7646-85-7 Solid 4 nos. Bag 0.2 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

55. Phosphorous

Trichloride

02-12-7719 Liquid 3 nos. Drum 0.6 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic

56. Closantel Amine 57808-65-8 Solid 61 nos. Bag 1.525 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

57. Diiodosalicycli Acid 133-91-5 Solid 85 nos. Drum 2.125 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

58. Sodium Metal 7440-23-5 Solid 7 nos. Drum 1.05 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

59. Caustic Potash 1310-58-3 Solid 15 nos. Bag 0.75 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

60. Para Formaldehyde 30525-89-4 Solid 15 nos. Drum 0.375 MT Solid RM Store Toxic, Fire

61. 2-Methylimidazole 693-98-1 Solid 2 nos. Drum 0.4 MT Solid RM Store Toxic

62. Liq. Ammonia 1336-21-6 Liquid 4 nos. Bottle 0.2 KL Liquid RM Store Toxic

The hazardous chemicals having high risks due to storage quantity, high Flammability and acute Toxicity

are analyzed labeled and separately listed in table-7.2. These Hazardous chemicals have the potential to

cause the maximum damage and create a vulnerability zone in and around the company operations. They

are selected and highlighted for better visibility. MSDS of chemicals to be handled is enclosed as annexure-

XVI.


TABLE-7.2 LIST OF MAJOR HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS INVENTRY & PROPERTIES

No. Source TPQ /

MT Cas No. Nature of Hazards

1. Methanol 20 KL 67-56-1

Highly flammable. Soluble in water. Flash Point: 52°F , B.P: 148.3°F

Toxic use PPE while handling.. ERPG1: 200 ppm., ERPG2: 1000

ppm., ERPG3: 5000 ppm., IDLH: 6000 ppm. Regulated chemical.

FLAMMABLE

2. Aniline

Oil 20 KL 62-53-3

Aniline oil is toxic and combustible in nature. Colorless liquid having

Aromatic (Amine like) ordor and Soluble in oil. B.P.: 184.1 oC, Odor

Threshold: 2.4 ppm, TWA: 7.6 (mg/m3) from ACGIH

TOXIC

3. Toluene 16 KL 108-88-3

Flammable liquid, insoluble in water. Flash Points: 4.4°C (40°F).

Flammable Limits: LOWER: 1.1% UPPER: 7.1% Boiling Point:

110.6°C (231.1°F), Odor Threshold: 1.6 ppm, AEGL-1 (60 min): 67

ppm AEGL-2 (60 min): 560 ppm AEGL-3 (60 min): 3700 ppm,

IDLH: 500 ppm

FLAMMABLE

4. Acetone 20 KL 67-64-1

Flammable liquid, Auto-Ignition Temperature: 465°C (869°F), Flash

Points: -20°C (-4°F), Flammable Limits: LOWER: 2.6% UPPER:

12.8%, Boiling Point: 56.2°C (133.2°F), Odor Threshold: 62 ppm,

AEGL-1 (60 min): 200 ppm AEGL-2 (60 min): 3200 ppm AEGL-3

(60 min): 5700 ppm

FLAMMABLE

Hazardous scenarios for the purpose of RISK ANALYSIS which are most likely to happen during

a. Storage conditions, b. during the manufacturing processes & handling are planned and listed in table-7.3.

These hazardous chemicals are assessed with the scenarios, for deriving and identifying the vulnerable

zones.

TABLE-7.3 RISK ANALYSIS

No. Source Scenarios Failure

Mechanism

RISK

Consequence Probability

1 Severity

2

Risk Rating3

(max = 25)

1. Acid spillage from

drums

Spillage during

handling

Puddle formation -

Toxic vapour 2 2 4

2. Leakage during

transfer of

Hydrogen gas from

the cylinder

Coupling fit not

fully

established

Leakage from the

coupling joint. Fire

or explosion. 2 2 4

3. Unloading pipe

coupling Loose in

Methanol unloading

Spillage during

handling

Puddle formation

in unloading area –

flammable vapor

3 2 6

4. Release of Toluene

from tank

Leakage from

tank

Puddle formation –

Pool fire 3 2 6

5. Release of Acetone

from tank

Leakage from

tank

Puddle formation –

Pool fire 3 2 6

6. Release of Aniline

Oil from tank

Leakage from

tank

Puddle formation -

Toxic vapour 2 2 4

LEGEND

1PROBABILITY:

2SEVERITY:

3RISK RATING:

1 – HIGHLY UNLIKELY 1 – EXTREMELY MILD PROBABILITY x SEVERITY

2 – UNLIKELY 2 – MILD

3 – SOMEWHAT LIKELY 3 – MODERATE

4 – LIKELY 4 – SEVERE

5 – VERY LIKELY 5 – MOST SEVERE


• There are few toxic severity scenario risks, on the operational and storage of chemicals.

• The worst-case scenario is also well within the reach of fire protection/mitigation measures, planned for

installation.

• Fire protection/ control / mitigation measures are incorporated.

All the raw material will be stored within premises in Drums, Carboys, bags and cylinder except Methanol,

Aniline Oil, Toluene and Acetone which will be stored in tank. Considering above rating M/s. Orbit Pharma

Laboratories can be categorized as a medium hazard industry who can manage their risks through invoking

On site emergency plan and actively participating in Off-site emergency plan.

During the navigation of above sequence of activities, it is drawn to the understanding that the storage &

handling are to be closely associated with the Threshold Planned quantities (TPQ) of hazardous

chemicals. This will ensure, the associated preventive / mitigating facilities planned and installed for

managing the projected risk scenarios will be serving the desired objectives.

The in-house regulatory measures for implanting safety shall be appropriate to the risks, and to be handled

by trained persons for the purpose. SOPs are to be documented and identified people are to be trained.

Regular mock drills shall be planned and executed, as a preparation/ precaution for dealing with emergency

operations.

7.2.3.1 ANTIDOTES OF MAJOR PRDUCTS/RAW MATERIALS

Antidotes of major products/raw materials are shown in following table-7.4.

TABLE-7.4 ANTIDOTES OF CHEMICALS

No. Name of Chemical Antidote

1. Bromine Wash the skin plenty of water. Apply sodium bi carbonate and again wash the

skin plenty of water. If gone in eye, wash plenty of water through spray up to 15

minutes. Put two or three drops of pontocane (0.5 solution) or benoxinate

(novesine) 0.4%. if problem in respiration, give milk, butter milk or lemon juice

or make a small cotton ball and drench with ethanol or ether solution drops and

put it near victim's nose for smell. Apply pure oxygen. If go in the intestine give

milk. Milk butter and milk of magnesia.

Dexona, Avil

2. Phenol and derivatives Take the patient in clean air, activated charcoal and 240ml milk, if the eye or

skin affected than wash with plenty of water, clean the skin with poly ethylene

glycol.

3. Acetic Acid Milk of magnesia

4. Aniline Oil Methylene Blue

5. Di Methyl Amine Methylene Blue

6. Hydrochloric Acid Drink Larqe Quality of water , Milk of Maqnesia

7. Iso Propyl Alcohol Novasine Eye Drops

8. Acetic Acid Milk of maqnesia

9. Methanol Oxygen or Baking Soda in a glass of water or Ethanol, Novasine Eye Drops

10. Monochloro Acetic

Acid

Silver Sulphadiazine

11. Xylene, Toluene. Wash the skin area plenty of water if affected. Fresh air or Oxygen, 0.1 mg/kg

slowly through injection rest in bed. Don't apply Epinefrin, Ifridin etc. Don't

apply milk, vegetable oil or alcohol.

7.2.3.2 ACTION PLAN FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR THE STORAGE OF MATERIALS

Storage in HDPE drums / Carboys or bags:

- Separately stored with proper enclosures and marked, within premises in closed shed

- Proper ventilation will be provided

- Sufficient fire extinguishers and PPE will be provided

- Flame proof fittings will be provided


- Smoking will be prohibited

- Bags/drums/ carboys will be stored on pallet with the suitable trap

Hazardous chemical handling, Storage, transportation and unloading:

- Hazardous material will be stored away from the plant and safe distance shall be maintained

- Dyke wall shall be provided to all above ground storage tank

- Proper selection of MOC for tank

- Fire hydrant system shall be installed

- Safety shower and eye washer shall be installed near storage area

- Sprinkler system shall be installed at flammable material storage area

- Flame proof light fitting shall be provided at flammable storage area

- Earthing/bonding shall be provided for static charges

- Only authorized person shall be permitted in storage tank area

- Methanol, Toluene, Acetone, Aniline Oil, etc shall be transported through road tanker

- Procedure shall be prepared for loading and unloading of Methanol received through road tanker

- Flame proof electric motor shall be used during loading/unloading

- Personal Protective Equipments (PPEs) shall be provided

- Term Card shall be provided to all transporters and shall be trained for transportation emergency of

hazardous chemicals

7.2.4 HAZARD AND ITS CONTROL MEASURES

Details of possible hazards or emergency at the site along with safety measures are given in following table.

TABLE-7.5 HAZARDS AND ITS CONTROL MEASURE

Sr.

No.

Name of the

possible hazard or

emergency

Its souses &

reason

Its effect on person,

property, &

environment

Place of its

effect Control measure provided

1. BOILER

1) Burning

physical injury

explosion

Over pressure in

the boiler if safety

valve not working.

Water level

indicator not

working. Low

water level

indicator fail. High

temp. system fail.

Minor/Major injury

loss of human life

loss of property (loss

of Main/machine

material)

Boiler House

and

surrounding

places

Lower & upper level indication

system provision. Safety valves for

pressure control fixed temp. &

pressure indicator provided. Blow

down & blowing system provided for

cleaning tube and shell. Soft water

used. Inter locking provided on

pumps, FD farm, ID fan. Periodical

checking & inspection maintenance

done. Yearly inspection done by

boiler inspector

2. ELECRICITY

(1) Burning

(2) Fire

(3) Shock

Loose contacts,

weak earthing short

circuit improper

insulation

Burning, shock,

Death

Surrounding

the accident

area

Proper Earthing, Periodical Checking

of joints, proper insulations of

Equipment, etc. flame proof fitting in

solvent storage area, bounding and

jumpers to all solvent barrier lines

provided

3. HOUSE

KEEPING

(1) Physical

(2) Burning

(3) Fire

(4) Chemical

explosion

Bad House keeping Physical / Chemical

Thermal Burn injury

(Major / Minor)

In all

surrounding

areas i.e.

storage plants

Proper handling, regular cleaning,

Proper placement of material.

4. PIPELINE

LEAKAGES

Spillages etc.

(1) Corrosion

(2) Toxic gas

release

Leaking of pipe

line to corrosion.

Loose contact etc.

Physical / Chemical

Thermal Burn injury

(Major / Minor)

Plant area Proper maintenance, Proper selection

of material for pipe lines, immediate

attention, Earthing provided, flame

proof fitting.

NO SMOKING Boards displayed.

5. Fire Transformer

Transfer oil short

circuit etc.

- Electrical power

failure

- Production

hindrance

Transformer

near power

control centre

- Fire Fighting Equipment's

- Graved bed for oil spillage or

soaking


Sr.

No.

Name of the

possible hazard or

emergency

Its souses &

reason

Its effect on person,

property, &

environment

Place of its

effect Control measure provided

- Loss of

transformer

- isolated fenced area

- Lightening arrestor nearby

- DG set for emergency power supply

6. Fire & Toxic

chemical spillage - Natural Disaster

i.e. Earthquakes,

storm,

Lighterning

- Sabotage Fire in

neighboring

- industries

- Production

hindrance

- Trapping under

debris, death

Chemical burn

Toxic chemical

spillage

Whole

factory &

population

nearby

- Hydrant system

- Sprinkler system in storage area

- Lightening arrestor at buildings

- First aid & ambulance available

- Smoking prohibited inside the

factory

- Security at all the time guarding

important locations

7. Fire & smoke Solvent fire in

storage tank

Burns

Storage tank

catching fire

Production hindrance

Whole

factory &

population

nearby

- Hydrant system with water

monitors

- Adequate earthing Tanker

unloading permit

- Unauthorized person not allowed to

enter

- Breathing Apparatus for rescue

operations

- Alarm system for indicating

unusual incidence

7.2.5 RISK IDENTIFICATION AND ANALYSIS

Identification of risks is done qualitatively and quantitatively through the selection of hazardous substances

and by studying the manufacturing process, to arrive at possible failures and their inherent causes.

Probability of risk occurrence is also ascertained in order to determine the MAXIMUM CREDIBLE

ACCIDENT SCENARIO and the WORST CASE SCENARIO.

Hazardous substances have been identified as follows considering the applicable criteria laid down under

the Chemical Accident (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996, as well as other

relevant guidelines:

The risks are then analyzed quantitatively in terms of probability, and severity. The risks have also been

rated according to the matrix R = Probability x Severity.

7.2.5.1 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE LOSS ACCIDENT SCENARIOS

A Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) can be characterised as the worst credible accident. In other words:

an accident in an activity, resulting in the maximum consequence distance that is still believed to be

possible. A MCA-analysis does not include a quantification of the probability of occurrence of the accident.

Another aspect, in which the pessimistic approach of MCA studies appears, is the atmospheric condition

that is used for dispersion calculations.

The Maximum Credible Loss (MCL) scenarios have been developed for the Facility. The MCL cases

considered, attempt to include the worst “Credible” incidents- what constitutes a credible incident is always

subjective. Nevertheless, guidelines have evolved over the years and based on basic engineering judgement,

the cases have been found to be credible and modelling for assessing vulnerability zones is prepared

accordingly. Only catastrophic cases have been considered and not partial or small failures (as is the case in

Quantitative Risk Assessment where contributions from low frequency - high outcome effect as well as

high frequency - low outcome events are distinguished). The objective of the study is emergency planning,

hence only holistic & conservative assumptions are used for obvious reasons. Hence though the outcomes

may look pessimistic, the planning for emergency concept should be borne in mind whilst interpreting the

results.


7.2.5.2 DAMAGE CRITERIA

In consequence analysis, use is made of a number of calculation models to estimate the physical effects of

an accident (spill of hazardous material) and to predict the damage (lethality, injury, material destruction) of

the effects. The calculations can roughly be divided in three major groups:

a) Determination of the source strength parameters;

b) Determination of the consequential effects;

c) Determination of the damage or damage distances.

The basic physical effect models consist of the following:

Source strength parameters

* Calculation of the outflow of liquid, vapour or gas out of a vessel or a pipe, in case of rupture.

Also two-phase outflow can be calculated.

* Calculation, in case of liquid outflow, of the instantaneous flash evaporation and of the dimensions

of the remaining liquid pool.

* Calculation of the evaporation rate, as a function of volatility of the material, pool dimensions and

wind velocity.

* Source strength equals pump capacities, etc. in some cases.

Consequential effects

* Dispersion of gaseous material in the atmosphere as a function of source strength, relative density

of the gas, weather conditions and topographical situation of the surrounding area.

* Intensity of heat radiation [in kW/ m2] due to a fire or a BLEVE, as a function of the distance to the

source.

* Energy of vapour cloud explosions [in N/m2], as a function of the distance to the distance of the

exploding cloud.

* Concentration of gaseous material in the atmosphere, due to the dispersion of evaporated chemical.

The latter can be either explosive or toxic.

It may be obvious, that the types of models that must be used in a specific risk study strongly depend upon

the type of material involved:

- Gas, vapour, liquid, solid

- Inflammable, explosive, toxic, toxic combustion products

- Stored at high/low temperatures or pressure

- Controlled outflow (pump capacity) or catastrophic failure

Selection of Damage Criteria

The damage criteria give the relation between extent of the physical effects (exposure) and the percentage

of the people that will be killed or injured due to those effects. The knowledge about these relations

depends strongly on the nature of the exposure. For instance, much more is known about the damage caused

by heat radiation, than about the damage due to toxic exposure, and for these toxic effects, the knowledge

differs strongly between different materials.

In Consequence Analysis studies, in principle three types of exposure to hazardous effects are

distinguished:

1. Heat radiation, from a jet, pool fire, a flash fire or a BLEVE.

2. Explosion

3. Toxic effects, from toxic materials or toxic combustion products.

In the next three paragraphs, the chosen damage criteria are given and explained.


Heat Radiation

The consequence caused by exposure to heat radiation is a function of:

• The radiation energy onto the human body [kW/m2

];

• The exposure duration [sec];

• The protection of the skin tissue (clothed or naked body).

• The limits for 1% of the exposed people to be killed due to heat radiation, and for second-degree

burns are given in the table-7.6 herein:

TABLE-7.6 DAMAGES TO HUMAN LIFE DUE TO HEAT RADIATION

Exposure

Duration

Radiation for 1%

lethality (kW/m2)

Radiation for 2nd

degree burns(kW/m2)

Radiation for first

degree burns, (kW/m2)

10 Sec 21.2 16 12.5

30 Sec 9.3 7.0 4.0

• Since in practical situations, only the employees will be exposed to heat radiation in case of a fire, it is

reasonable to assume the protection by clothing. It can be assumed that people would be able to find a

cover or a shield against thermal radiation in 10 sec. time. Furthermore, 100% lethality may be

assumed for all people suffering from direct contact with flames, such as the pool fire, a flash fire or a

jet flame. The effects due to relatively lesser incident radiation intensity are given below.

TABLE-7.7 EFFECTS DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITY

Incident Radiation in kw/m2 Type of Damage

0.7 Equivalent to Solar Radiation

1.6 No discomfort for long exposure

4.0 Sufficient to cause pain within 20 sec. Blistering of skin (first degree

burns are likely)

9.5 Pain threshold reached after 8 sec. second degree burns after 20 sec.

12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood, melting plastic

tubing etc.

Explosion

In case of vapour cloud explosion, two physical effects may occur:

* A flash fire over the whole length of the explosive gas cloud;

* A blast wave, with typical peak overpressures circular around ignition source.

As explained above, 100% lethality is assumed for all people who are present within the cloud proper.

For the blast wave, the lethality criterion is based on:

* A peak overpressure of 0.1 bar will cause serious damage to 10% of the housing/structures.

* Falling fragments will kill one of each eight persons in the destroyed buildings.

The following damage criteria may be distinguished with respect to the peak overpressures resulting from a

blast wave:

TABLE-7.8 DAMAGE DUE TO OVERPRESSURES

Peak Overpressure Damage Type

0.83 bar Total Destruction

0.30 bar Heavy Damage


Peak Overpressure Damage Type

0.10 bar

0.03 bar

Moderate Damage

Significant Damage

0.01 bar Minor Damage

From this it may be concluded that p = 0.17 E+5 pa corresponds approximately with 1% lethality.

Furthermore, it is assumed that everyone inside an area in which the peak overpressure is greater than 0.17

E+5 pa will be wounded by mechanical damage. For the gas cloud explosion, this will be inside a circle

with the ignition source as its centre.

Intoxication

The consequences from inhalation of a toxic vapour/gas are determined by the toxic dose.

This dose D is basically determined by:

- Concentration of the vapour in air;

- Exposure duration.

Furthermore, of course, the breathing rates of the victim, as well as the specific toxic mechanism unto the

metabolism play an important role.

The dose is defined as D = Cn

.t, with:

C = concentration of the toxic vapour, in [ppm] or [mg/m3];

t = exposure duration, in [sec] or [min];

n = exponent, mostly > 1.0; this exponent takes into account the fact that a high concentration

over a short period results in more serious injury than a low concentration over a relatively

longer period of exposure. The value of n should be greater than zero but less than 5.

The given definition for D only holds if the concentration is more or less constant over the exposure time;

this may be the case for a (semi) continuous source. In case of an instantaneous source, the concentration

varies with time; the dose D must be calculated with an integral equation:

D = ∫ Cn.dt

For a number of toxic materials, so-called Vulnerability Models (V.M.) have been developed. The general

equation for a V.M. (probit function) is:

Pr = a + b.ln (Cn.t), with

Pr = probit number, being a representation of the percentage of people suffering a certain kind

of damage, for instance lethality

Pr = 2.67 means 1% of the population;

Pr = 5.00 means 50% of the population;

a and b material dependent numbers;

Cn.t = dose D, as explained above.

The values for a and b are mostly derived from experiments with animals; occasionally, however, also

human toxicity factors have been derived from accidents in past. In case only animal experiments are

available, the inhalation experiments with rats seem to be best applicable for predicting the damage to

people from acute intoxication. Although much research in this field have been done over the past decades,

only for a limited number of toxic materials consequence models have been developed. Often only quite

scarce information is available to predict the damage from an acute toxic exposition. Data transformation

from oral intoxication data to inhalation toxicity criteria is sometimes necessary. Generally, in safety

evaluations pessimistic assumptions are applied in these transformation calculations. The calculated

damage (distance) may be regarded as a maximum. For the purposes of a response to a major incident, the

IDLH value level has been chosen for the ‘wounded‘ criteria. This type of injury will require medical

attention.


7.2.5.2.1 SOFTWARE USED FOR CALCULATIONS

ALOHA (Areal Locations of Hazardous Atmospheres):

Aloha is a computer program designed especially for use by people responding to chemical accidents, as

well as for emergency planning and training. ALOHA can predict the rates at which chemical vapors may

escape into the atmosphere from broken gas pipes, leaking tanks, and evaporating puddles. It can then

predict how a hazardous gas cloud might disperse in the atmosphere after an accidental chemical release.

ALOHA is an air dispersion model, which you can use as a tool for predicting the movement and dispersion

of gases. It predicts pollutant concentrations downwind from the source of a spill, taking into consideration

the physical characteristics of the spilled material. ALOHA also accounts for some of the physical

characteristics of the release site, weather conditions, and the circumstances of the release. Like many

computer programs, it can solve problems rapidly and provide results in a graphic, easy-to-use format. This

can be helpful during an emergency response or planning for such a response.

ALOHA provides output as amount of chemical discharged from the source as well as its concentration in

air it takes in to account different levels of concentrations for a specified chemical. Different concentration

levels are given below:

ERPG 1: is the maximum airborne concentration below which it is believed that nearly all individuals

could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing other than mild transient adverse health effects or

perceiving a clearly defined, objectionable odor.


could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing irreversible or other serious health

effects or symptoms which could impair an individual's ability to take protective action.


could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing life-threatening health effects.

IDLH: The Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) level. A chemical's IDLH is an estimate of

the maximum concentration in the air to which a healthy worker could be exposed without suffering

permanent or escape-impairing health effects.

7.2.5.3 VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS

A vulnerability analysis is carried out on the MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO. The

analysis is carried out using the help of sophisticated computer software which provides the zone of

influence as well as the geographical risk contours.

The calculations are complex in nature, and various parameters are defined to assist the software in

simulating the risk contours. The parameters include details such as the size of the leakages / holes, quantity

of materials released, duration of the release, weather and geographical conditions.

The simulations are generated under standard operating conditions. Data given in the reports and manuals

are taken as correct information. The weather conditions are taken as per table-7.9 for all simulations.

TABLE-7.9 WEATHER CONDITIONS

Parameters Condition A Condition B

Wind Speed 10.0 m/s 3.0 m/s

Pasquill Stability D F

Ground Roughness Urban Forest Urban Forest

Air Temperature (°C) 30 25

Surface temperature 30 25

Relative Humidity 50% 50%

Cloud Cover 50% 50%


7.2.5.4 MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO

The MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO was analyzed based on flammable vapor and toxic

vapor risks. The ALOHA simulation software was used to obtain the risk contours and the zone of

influence, as well as levels of risk associated with each zone.

The calculations performed are based on Unified Dispersion Modeling and provide the foot prints of

hazardous chemical dispersion and the distances of critical concentrations for flammability and toxicity.

The model considers a three stage method as given in the following illustration:

POOL SPREADING AND VAPORIZATION

The release containing liquid droplets forms a pool. Any

evaporation from this pool will contribute to the dispersing

pool.

Evaporation

↓ DISPERSION

The vapor cloud disperses in the atmosphere until it has

reached harmless concentration.

Calculation of the concentration profile of the cloud

↓

FLAMMABILITY AND TOXICITY

The results of the ALOHA simulation as well as the parameters used for carrying out the simulations is

given below in tables. Downwind concentrations of chemicals are shown.

SCENARIOS CONSIDERED:

1. Maximum Credible Accident scenario for Toluene – “Pool Fire” - Threat Zone Evaluation :

Chemical Data: Chemical Name: TOLUENE

CAS Number: 108-88-3 Molecular Weight: 92.14 g/mol

AEGL-1 (60 min): 67 ppm AEGL-2 (60 min): 560 ppm AEGL-3 (60 min): 3700 ppm

IDLH: 500 ppm LEL: 11000 ppm UEL: 71000 ppm

Ambient Boiling Point: 110.4° C

Vapor Pressure at Ambient Temperature: 0.048 atm

Ambient Saturation Concentration: 48,691 ppm or 4.87%

A. For Atmospheric Stability Condition ‘D’

Source Strength: Leak from hole in horizontal cylindrical tank

Flammable chemical is burning as it escapes from tank

Tank Diameter: 2 meters Tank Length: 5.1 meters

Tank Volume: 16.0 cubic meters Tank contains liquid

Internal Temperature: 30° C Chemical Mass in Tank: 13.7 tons

Tank is 90% full Circular Opening Diameter: 1 inches


Opening is 5 centimeters from tank bottom Max Flame Length: 5 meters

Burn Duration: ALOHA limited the duration to 1 hour Max Burn Rate: 24.5 kilograms/min

Total Amount Burned: 1,451 kilograms

Note: The chemical escaped as a liquid and formed a burning puddle.

The puddle spread to a diameter of 2.5 meters.

Threat Zone: Threat Modeled: Thermal radiation from pool fire

Red : less than 10 meters(10.9 yards) --- (10.0 kW/(sq m) = potentially lethal within 60 sec)

Orange: 10 meters --- (5.0 kW/(sq m) = 2nd degree burns within 60 sec)

Yellow: 13 meters --- (2.0 kW/(sq m) = pain within 60 sec)

B. For Atmospheric Stability Condition ‘F’

Source Strength:

Leak from hole in horizontal cylindrical tank













Red : less than 10 meters(10.9 yards) --- (10.0 kW/(sq m) = potentially lethal within 60 sec)



2. Maximum Credible Accident scenario for Methanol - “Pool Fire” - Threat Zone Evaluation :

Chemical Data: Chemical Name: METHANOL



IDLH: 6000 ppm LEL: 71800 ppm UEL: 365000 ppm


















Red : 12 meters --- (10.0 kW/(sq m) = potentially lethal within 60 sec)




















3. Maximum Credible Accident scenario for Acetone : “Pool Fire”- Atmospheric Stability Condition

‘D’

Chemical Data: Chemical Name: ACETONE



LEL: 26000 ppm UEL: 130000 ppm

















Threat Zone:

Threat Modeled: Thermal radiation from pool fire












Burn Duration: ALOHA limited the duration to 1 hour

Max Burn Rate: 93.7 kilograms/min









RISK ASSESSMENT& MANAGEMENT

1. Hazardous materials list is prepared for raw materials / intermediate products. Analyzed for possible

On-site Emergency and Off site emergency conditions.

2. Threshold Planned quantities (TPQ) are planned for the plant operations. Most of the raw materials are

indigenous and locally procured. Hence the storage of materials are planned max. only for 30 days.

Makeup quantities shall be planned as a on-line system liking to the quantity of storage.

3. QRA analysis done for the hazardous raw materials. Vulnerability study done to assess the impact on

the nearby areas / Working persons inside the plant.

4. Quantum of Raw materials / Finished products are so low that there is practically no vulnerability

zone. Persons working in the plant, who are away by 10m down wind direction and 5 m on cross wind

direction, are safe to work with designated PPEs.

5. It is easy to control the manpower due to less number of employees and automated systems of

processes.

6. The finished products also pose less risk. The quantity of less per day, does not pose any high risk and

these products are immediately shipped out in the same shift.

7. Incompatibility standards of storage of hazardous materials advised, to avoid any escalation of risk. As

the storage space is limited, Vertical storage is advised with suitable design of racks.


7.2.6 RISK PREVENTION AND RISK MITIGATION

Accident prevention is the primary safety goal of any organization. There are risks that can be eliminated

through preventive measures and those which can be reduced through mitigation measures.

7.2.6.1 PREVENTIVE MEASURES

The 4 E’s for elimination of hazards and prevent accidents are as follows:

• Engineering and technological innovation to improve reliability

• Experience in the study of hazards and operations- Risk analysis

• Enforcement of decisions on study results – Preventive mechanisms

• Education, awareness, and practice in prevention of accidents (Training & drills)

Various measures will be adopted at each stage of the project for ensuring safety of people, environment,

and property. These measures include the following:

• Site selection

• Choice of technology

• Equipment design incorporating domestic and international safety codes

• Plant layout with utmost consideration given to operational safety aspects

• Incorporation of interlocks and protection systems in plant design

• Safety awareness for key management persons

• Safety training of all operational , maintenance staff

• Regular safety monitoring - Audits and inspections

A. Site Selection

The plant is located adjacent Kadi Chhatral Highway. The site soil conditions are rigid and safe, complying

with the requirements of the load bearing capacity of various installations.

B. Choice of Technology

The process is carefully chosen for reducing wastes, reducing the risk to human beings and the

environment. It is the proven one and acknowledged internationally.

C. Equipment Design

Mechanical

1. All process equipments operating under pressure are designed as per ASME Section VIII pressure

vessel code for un-fired pressure vessels. The material of construction selected is compatible with

the chemicals handled to ensure minimum corrosion effects.

2. Heat exchangers are designed as per TEMA Class B and Class C standards as applicable.

3. Process tanks and vessels are sized taking into account minimum storage of intermediates and are

provided with adequate instrumentation to measure temperature, pressure, level etc.

4. All process pumps are either glandless canned or provided with double mechanical seals to ensure

no leakage during operation. Critical process pumps are also provided with bearing temperature

monitors which will ensure timely maintenance of rotating parts.

Piping

1. All pipes, fittings, and valves carrying the haz-chem are made of appropriate grade Steel, stainless

steel and with PTFE (Teflon) envelop gaskets.

2. All pipes carrying haz-chem are designed to ensure non-restrictive flow from one equipment to

another with minimum hold up of haz-chem in the lines.

3. All pipelines will be color coded as per the standard for easy identification of materials.

4. Pipeline sizes will be chosen such that pressure drops due to flow will be within permitted limits.

Critical velocity parameters are exceeded to avoid static electricity generation.

5. Wherever required, design incorporates suitable by-pass system to carry out maintenance work

during plant operations and also to enable sectional close-down during machinery break down, etc.


6. Safety valves, relief valves, breather valves and rupture discs are mounted on hook-up piping to all

critical equipment.

7. Moderately warm pipes carrying fluids at > 50-60 °C will be insulated from the point of personnel

protection.

8. All manually operated valves will be located within easy reach of operator and at a operable height.

Wherever necessary approach platforms will be provided.

9. Adequate number of flange joints shall be provided with adequate supports in long lines for easy

dismantling and maintenance.

Electrical

1. Plant areas are segregated into zone areas as per the hazards present, with adequate distances to

separate the two zones vide Petroleum Rules.

2. Areas designated as Zone -0,1 areas will have all electrical fixtures including lighting fixtures,

switches, junction boxes, cable glands, etc. of approved make and flameproof type.

3. For stand by power diesel generator of adequate capacity will be installed with auto-start facility in

case of power trip/failure. This DG set will be located far away from the processing area.

4. All tanks, pumps, tankers, and pipelines are properly earthed and bonded for electrical continuity

and prevention of static electric charges. Double earthing will be provided to drain electrical charge

to two independent earth pits.

5. All incomers to the electrical panels including MCCs and PCC will have air circuit breakers of

adequate capacity for electrical protection of equipments connected to the outgoing feeders.

6. All feeders in MCCs and PCC will have user point identification at both termination ends for easy

tracking of faults and rectification.

7. Adequate ventilation fans will be provided in electrical panels for effective heat dissipation.

8. Earthing pits locations and requirements with looping grids shall be provided as per the legal and

regulatory requirements.

9. Overhead cable routing will take into account safe distances from buildings and facilities.

Underground cabling shall be marked with metal markers as per the regulatory requirements.

10. All panels will have incomer earth fault relay.

11. Lightning arrestors will be provided on top of all structures.

12. All cables running on trays at elevation shall be properly dressed up and tied with clamps for

rigidity.

13. All areas of plant and machinery and roads including all open operating areas are illuminated

sufficiently to carry out operations round the clock.

D. Plant Layout

1. The plant is laid out in such a way that hazards are either eliminated or isolated so as to manage it

effectively.

2. The location of the disaster prone areas of the plant is such that, they cause less impact to the

nearby factories or inhabitations.

3. Room housing heat generating equipment or containing chemicals are well-ventilated with

adequate air circulation.

4. Process plants which handles hazchem are designed as an open structure with all sides open for

adequate ventilation

5. Administrative office is located away from process plants and storage tank.

6. Security office is located close to gate and away from process plants and storage area.

7. Workers’ rest area, shower, and dispensary is located close to administrative office, away from

process plants.

8. Canteen is located close to administrative office and away from process plants.


9. Adequate number of safety showers and eye wash fountains are provided in areas close to storage

facilities and process plants and on each floor wherever necessary

10. A separate area has been provided on site in the upwind direction for emergency evacuation-

Assembly Points.

11. Interconnecting roads within the plot are made circular so that more than one get-away is available

at any point.

12. A second gate is provided for use in case of emergency.

13. Proper drainage and enclosures are provided to drain away storm water from unforeseen flooding.

14. Flame proof areas have been isolated from the non-flameproof areas.

15. DG room and electrical transformer located away from administrative office, process plant and

storage area.

16. The storage area of hazchem is located in an isolated area, with adequate facilities for handling

spills and leakages.

17. Fire hydrant system covers the entire operating area of the plant.

18. Warning boards will be put up in areas where entry is restricted

19. No Smoking boards will be put up at the entrance and at other locations throughout the plant

20. Boards showing the numbers and contact details of government / district officials as well as fire

department, police department, district commissioner, etc. will be installed at security gate as well

as in the operational area.

21. Battery-cum-electrically operated emergency alarms will be made available.

22. Speed breakers and speed limit signs will be displayed as required

23. Hazardous chemicals shall be stored as per compatibility and based on corrosive and reactive

capabilities as per the guidelines in the MSDS.

24. MSDS of all hazardous chemicals will be kept in the areas where such materials are used and

stored.

25. Waste containers will be located at appropriate locations throughout the plant, and will be coded

according to the type of waste.

F. Safety Awareness for Key Management

1. Key management personnel will be made aware from the beginning of the project of the key issues

regarding the safety in design and operation of the plant.

2. Project management personnel have visited several industrial plants where hazchem is used in bulk

as a raw material for the production of finished products. Discussions with operational staff of the

plants during these visits has given them valuable insight into the safety aspects of handling of

hazchems.

3. Discussions on safe handling of hazchems have been carried out with various safety experts,

technical collaborators, and with overseas suppliers through conference calls.

G. Safety Training for All Operational Staff

1. All operational staff will be given safety training as a compulsory part of their induction program.

2. Safety training will include, among other things, the following important aspects:

a. awareness of hazards of individual chemicals through study of MSDS

b. correct usage of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

c. explanation of the hazards and risks present in the premises, as well as their analysis

d. impact on safety, health, and environment due to improper handling of hazardous

chemicals

e. guidelines for safety in operations

f. Do’s and Don'ts


H. Safety Audits and Inspections

1. Regular safety audit will be conducted to ascertain the safety levels followed in the plant and

suggestions for improvement

2. Special safety audits will be conducted whenever there are process-related equipment / operational

changes made in the plant

3. Testing and inspection of high pressure equipment with periodical hydrotesting and thickness

testing will be carried out during maintenance shutdown

4. Testing of pressure safety valves and setting will be carried out once in a year during maintenance

shutdown

5. Calibration of control valves, instruments as and when required, but at least once in a year during

maintenance shutdown

6. Testing of electrical measurements, such as earthing resistance, will be carried out every year.

7. Testing of all fire hydrant installations, fire extinguishers, fire pumps, fire water level monitors will

be carried regularly.

7.2.6.2 MITIGATION MEASURES

Risk mitigation involves the reduction of the likelihood of a loss occurring due to an accident and the

reduction of the severity of such a loss.

Several risk mitigation measures have been taken into consideration in the planning of this project:

• Personal Protective Equipment

• Medical facilities

• Handling of leakages and spills

• Firefighting system

• Engineering controls

• Emergency Control Centre

• Disaster Management Plan

A. Personal Protective Equipment

Personal protective equipment (PPE) are needed to protect individuals from injury. Several types of PPE

are necessary for providing the optimum protection to individuals from the various risks. In addition to the

PPE which will be used for regular plant operation, the following PPE has been selected for preservation at

the plant’s Emergency Control Centre room for use in case of emergency:

TABLE-7.10 LIST OF PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

No. List of personal protective equipment Total (nos.)

1. B. A. set 1

2. Ear Plug 50

3. Hand Gloves 50

4. Gum Boots 10

5. Goggles 50

6. Helmets 25

7. Safety Belts 5

8. Aprons 5

9. Fire Proximity Suit 4

10. Safety Shoe 20

11. Ear Muff 5

12. Face Shield 10

13. Chemical Splash Goggle 10


Details of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE’s), its Care and Management System proposed by the

company are given below:

Training:

1. Induction Training:

All employees including contract workmen given Induction training at the time of Joining for proper

use of safety equipment and PPEs with demonstration.

2. Special Training:

Company will arrange Special training for types of PPEs and adequate Use of PPEs as per training

calendar.

3. On Job training:

During On Job training , company will cover the right Use of PPEs as hazard and work

4. Training for Self Contained Breathing Apparatus and Emergency Life Saving Apparatus:

Company arranges training for Use of Self Contained Breathing Apparatus and Emergency Life Saving

Apparatus for all Employee including contract workmen.

Body Protection (Non Respiratory):

1. Protecting Clothing

1. Chemical Resistant Suit: for protection against chemical other then Acid.

2. PVC Suit: for protection against Acid & Alkali other then Hydrofluoric Acid

3. Apron: for working in Laboratory, Laboratory Apron is compulsory.

2. Head Protection (Safety Helmet):

Use of different color helmet for easy identification during the Emergency Situation.

• Yellow Color Helmet : for the Employees of the company

• Green Color Helmet : for Contract Workmen.

• White Color Helmet : for Visitor

• Blue Color Helmet : for Incident Controller at time of Emergency Handling.

3. Face & Eye Protection :

1. Face Shield: For working at Hazardous chemical, grinding work etc.

2. Safety Spectacles: for working in anywhere in plant side.

3. Safety Goggle: for covering of Full eye at time of certain defined job.

4. Ear Protection :

Ear Muff/Ear Plug: For working in High noise area.

5. Hand Protection:

1. PVC Gloves: For Hazardous chemicals like Acid, alkali, Hydrocarbons etc.

2. Chemical Resistant Gloves (Neoprene): for Chemical where PVC gloves not suitable.

3. Leather Gloves: for protection from cuts, abrasions, flying particles mildly hot materials.

4. Rubber Gloves (Electrical): for electrical work available with different voltage ratings

5. Rubber Gloves: for chemicals, oil greases

6. Foot Protection: 1. Safety Shoes: all employees of the company should wear safety shoes compulsory.

2. Gum Boot: for working in water, deep mud or bottom sediment.

Respiratory Protection:

1. Air Purifying Type: 1. Dust Mask: for protection against dust particle use at dusting atmosphere.

2. Chemical Cartridges Respirators: for toxic gaseous area. It is used for exit from the area if any gas

leakage.


2. Air Supplying Type: 1. Self Contain Breathing Apparatus (SCBA): for emergency Handing.

2. Emergency Life Saving Apparatus (ELSA): as like SCBA but its capacity is low.

3. Air Hood Mask: for working in Confined space or gaseous atmosphere, there will be continue supply

of Fresh air by Blower.

General Protection:

1. Safety Belt: double harness full body safety belt is compulsory for work at height.

2. Safety Net: used for work at height.

3. Safety Shower: for first aid treatment in case of chemical exposure on body

4. Eye Washer Fountains: for first aid treatment in case of eye exposure.

Care of PPE’s:

� Each and every personal protective equipment should be visual checked by the user for its integrity

before its use and, if any defects are observed, the concerned supervisor should be promptly informed

and the defects corrected or PPE replaced.

� Self-contained breathing apparatus must be inspected monthly and details of the inspection and

maintenance recorded.

� All employees should familiarize themselves with different types of PPEs available in the company.

� When not in use, PPE should be carefully stored in a designated place. Do not put it in tool box where it

is likely to be damaged or allow it to lie in an open place where it may collect dust. Store PPE in a safe

place well covered, away from sunlight and dust.

� Do not use the PPE’s other than its purpose or don’t temper with any PPE’s.

B. Medical Facilities

Medical facilities are needed to provide immediate medical attention to people who may be exposed to

certain health risks during an accident.

1. First Aid Centre will be located at the Workers’ Facility near the administrative building and

canteen.

2. A doctor will visit the plant periodically.

3. First Aid Centre will be equipped with a safety shower, eye wash centre, and oxygen-administering

facility, etc.

4. Medicines and antidotes for relevant hazardous chemicals will be stored for 5 persons.

5. The contact numbers of all nearby hospitals and medical facilities will be kept and put up on a

board in the First Aid Centre.

6. A general agreement for immediate treatment will be made between the nearest hospital and the

plant.

dC. Handling of Leakages and Spills

Quick and safe handling of leakages and spills is the most effective method of risk mitigation in the plant.

The company will take the following steps to ensure that leakages and spills can be effectively handled:

1. Ensuring availability and provisioning of suitable PPE for handling spills and leakages.

2. Preparation of handling manuals and placement of the same at important locations.

3. Placement of sand buckets, AFFF (aqueous film forming foam) fire extinguishers, and dry chemical

(potassium bicarbonate-based) fire extinguishers at high risk areas.

4. Provisioning of specially marked containers for disposal of spillages.

5. Decontamination area has been earmarked for clothing contaminated by spills.

6. Creation of dykes in the areas where likelihood of spillages and leakage is greatest.

7. Eye-wash stations and showers.

In case the leakage or spill can be handled by on-site trained personnel using proper protective clothing and

equipment, the incident is not considered an emergency situation. Such non-emergency situations can

include malfunctioning pumps, defective pipelines or leaking valves or seals. Also small spills may occur

but can generally be handled without alarm.


The MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO can be suitably handled without creating an

emergency situation. In the WORST CASE ACCIDENT SCENARIO, the designated incident controller

will be alerted and he will ensure that the emergency is properly dealt with and mitigated with all resources

available at our disposal, as per the guidelines laid out in the Disaster Management Plan.

D. Firefighting Systems

Due to the handling of flammable chemicals in the plant, it is necessary to provide an effective and efficient

firefighting system. A map of the firefighting installations is given in the plant site layout. Some of the

salient features are described as follows:

1. Fire water tank capacity and pump capacity of are based on the number of monitors, risers, and

outlets provided.

2. All firewater piping is located above ground to prevent hidden corrosion effects.

3. All fire hydrant points will have two independent ring mains for adequate water flow and safety.

All fire Nozzles shall be Spray type OR Mist type suitable for surround fighting system.

M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories management shall take into consideration fire prevention measures at the

project planning and during plant commissioning stage to avoid any outbreak of fire. But looking to the

hazardous nature of manufacturing operation shall be handled and processed, the chances of outbreak of fire

is however less but cannot be refuted. Hence to avoid such a scenario, a well laid fire protection system is

provided in the factory which will be upgraded. List of existing and proposed firefighting equipment’s are

given in table-7.10.

TABLE-7.11 LIST OF PROPOSED FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENTS

No. Firefighting

equipment’s Capacity

Quantity


1. Fire Extinguisher

(DCP and CO2 type)

5, 8 & 10 Kgs 16 25 42

2. Mechanical Foam 9.0 Liters 0 4 4

3. Sand Bucket Stand 3 – 4 Buckets 1 2 3

4. Sand Buckets 08 Liters 1 2 3

5. Hydrant Post - 0 15 15

6. Water Reservoir 300 KL 0 300 KL 300 KL

7. Hose rill 63 mm Día 0 10 10

8. Foam Monitor 100 mm Dia. 0 1 1

9. Foam Trolley 50 Ltr. 0 1 1

10. Smoke Detector - 0 10 10

11. Heat Detector - 0 2 2

12. Public communication - Electric Siren System

- Manual Siren System

- Public Announcement System

covered all Plant Area

- Mega Phone 01 KM Cap.

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Facilities of fire and safety services are also easily available in the study area.

E. Emergency Control Centre

The Emergency Control Centre is a designated room that shall be occupied by the Incident Controller, the

final authority to give directives, coordinate with various teams, communicate with district government

agencies, and to deal with an emergency inside the plant. The following documents and equipment shall be

kept here for the use of the Incident Controller during an emergency:


1. Updated drawings and P&I diagrams of plant

2. Site layout plan showing raw materials and finished products storage area, security gates, assembly

points, process plants, utility building and other areas of the plant

3. Disaster Management Plan

4. List of key plant operating personnel

5. Telephone numbers and contact details of key plant operating personnel

6. Telephone numbers and contact details of district government officials and emergency offices

7. Personal Protective Equipment for emergency use

8. Fire extinguishers (dry chemical powder filled)

7.2.6.3 DO’S AND DON’TS

Suitable notices / boards displayed at several locations indicating appropriate hazards warning as well as

DOs and DON’T for ensuring operational and personal Safety for information of workers / staff and

visitors.

Do’s:

1) Check the available raw material as per the job on hand required for all stages.

2) For good physical condition, check the vessels expected to be used in the process.

3) Check the availability of utilities required till the end of the batch / job.

4) Check for proper manpower available till the entire operation in over.

5) Each and every equipment including the stand-by should be in operable condition.

6) Verify the test certificates of materials being taken for process.

7) Time schedule should prepare for material flow on basis of the process.

8) Monitor the temperature and pressure if possible during the process.

9) Use pumps for transferring the liquids to the reactor tank.

10) Familiarize the worker about what is the job on hand.

11) The worker or operator should have sufficient knowledge of the materials handling.

12) Visual instructions should properly display for characteristics of the chemicals.

13) Ensure proper training of personnel.

14) Ensure sufficient numbers of safety devices are available.

15) In view of the chemicals handled, whether required or not, please ensure availability of SCBA

apparatus near every use and storage area of chemical.

16) Ensure the workers wear proper PPE of adequate grade.

17) Demarcation of the chemical storage area for chemical in test.

18) Ensure removal of used containers from workspaces.

19) Prepare and follow the safe work instruction.

20) Record every incident that led to an accident irrespective of the seriousness of the accident and

analyze the same to improvise the system continuously.

21) Always check the fire water tank to be filled up to the brim to ensure availability of fire water in

sufficient quantity at all times. The design of other water to be used shall be from the overflow of

the fire water tank to ensure this system.

22) Never work bare foot or without safety shoes.

23) Never use mobile phones in work zones.

24) Use only proper grade PPEs and use them properly.

25) Open or use containers only on written instruction.

26) Verify the label with the instruction before use.

27) Participate wholeheartedly in all safety related exercises an keep yourself updated.

Don’ts:

1) Without checking of raw material don’t use it as per the job on hand required for all stages.

2) Don’t use the vessels expected to be used in the process without checking.

3) Don’t fail to check the availability of utilities required till the end of the batch / job

4) Don’t work without enough and proper man power.

5) Don’t use the equipments which are not in operable condition.


6) Don’t use the materials for process without verify the test certificates.

7) Don’t use the material without Prepare time schedule of material flow on basis of the process.

8) Don’t perform without Monitoring the temperature and pressure during process.

9) Don’t handle chemicals with open hands where manual handling is a must.

10) Don’t keep the workers under wraps about what is the job on hand.

11) Don’t let the worker / operator do the work having lack of sufficient knowledge of the materials

handled.

12) Don’t use the chemical with unknown characteristics or having unreadable label.

13) Don’t let the personnel do the work without giving proper training.

14) Don’t work without sufficient numbers of safety devices.

15) Don’t let the workers do work without wearing proper PPE of adequate grade.

16) Don’t use material that is under testing for production.

17) Don’t store used containers at workspaces.

18) Don’t breach the safe work instruction.

19) Don’t try to conceal information regarding missed accidents or small injuries. Remember every and

any mishap can be fatal if not for yourself for others.

20) After any shutdown never start operation without having ensured the fire water tank filled up.

21) Don’t work bare foot or without safety shoes.

22) Don’t use mobile phones in work zones.

23) Do not use PPEs which are not relevant to the operational aspect that has been identified.

24) Don’t open or use containers on which instruction are not written.

25) Don’t work without Verifying the label with the instruction before use.

26) Don’t ever even thinking of evading safety instructions.

7.2.7 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

7.2.7.1 OBJECTIVES OF EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Measures those are required to be taken during emergency are co-ordination of activities with many

departments/ services and outside resources.

The objective of the procedure is to define role of key personnel of different services during major

emergency to be effectively utilized to:

1) Safeguard lives

2) Contains of incident and bring it under control

3) Minimize damage to property & neighboring environment

4) Rescue & treatment of casualties & evacuation of persons to safe areas

5) Identification of affected persons, information to relatives and extending necessary assistance.

6) Preservation of information, records etc. which will help in investigation

7) Welfare assistance to casualties

8) Providing relevant information to police, district authorities and news media

9) Mobilizing inside resources

10) Initiating and organizing evacuation of affected persons

11) Collecting latest status, other information and requirement

7.2.7.2 BASIS OF PLAN AND HANDLING OF EMERGENCY

1) It is not possible to envisage and detail every action, which should be taken during an emergency.

The basic philosophy is to get key personnel of necessary discipline who have the knowledge and

background to assess the situation and give directions as per the objectives as quickly as possible.

2) The plan identifies the services/departments required to combat emergencies and also identifies the

key persons to discharge the duties.

3) Key personnel have been identified for emergencies and are responsible for providing necessary

assistance.

4) Any outside assistance, which company shall get, shall be co-ordinate by the main site controller on

duty.


5) Messages via telephones are restricted to key personnel only. This is required to keep the

telephones free for key personnel to contact for necessary feed-back.

6) Senior person who arrives on scene is automatically in charge for the service group. He should not

leave the site without entrusting the charge to his deputy. All the key personnel should be available

at the main control room. All key personnel of other services will report to main site controller,

who will co- ordinate between various departments and outside agencies.

7.2.7.3 INFORMATION ABOUT EMERGENCY AND SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS

1) Any person noticing fire/explosion/re lease of hazardous gases should shout FIRE, FIRE or HELP,

HELP and will activate the emergency bell

2) Inform respective control rooms

3) The Executive in-charge along with the concerned Dept. Head will immediately rush to the incidence

site to assess and take immediate action required to control the source of incidence. They will also

inform Security and Safety personnel to come to the place of disaster/emergency and assist them.

4) If he feels that the situation is likely to escalate and may lead to emergency will communicate

following minimum information to all senior persons.

a) Brief description of incident.

b) Status & seriousness of the situation

c) Actions immediately taken.

d) Immediate assistance required.

e) All key personnel of respective services, depending on nature of emergency will arrive at site to

take charge of positions.

7.2.7.4 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYEES

The plan assumes certain discipline at site during emergency as given below;

1) Do not get panicky

2) Do not approach the scene of disaster as a spectator

3) Do not engage phones/ P.A. system unnecessarily

4) Non-essential personnel to gather at security gate after receiving instructions

5) Do not move here & there unnecessarily

6) Do not approach unnecessarily to get information or more inquiry

7) Remain at your working place unless called and be attentive to instructions

8) Ensure that all contract laborers working in the premises are immediately sent to main security gate.

They will receive further instructions from main site controller

All non - essential staff members should gather at safe assembly point after assessing the wind direction

(from the wind sock, stack of boiler chimney) and wait for further instructions which will be communicated

through PA system or by other available means.

7.2.7.5 INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS

The plan assumes certain discipline at site during emergencies as given below;

1) Do not get panicky

2) Do not approach the scene of disaster as a spectator

3) Do not engage phones/ P.A. system unnecessarily

4) Non-essential personnel to gather at security gate after receiving instructions

5) Do not move here & there unnecessarily.

6) Do not approach unnecessarily for information or more inquiry.

7) Remain at your working place unless called and be attentive to instructions

8) Ensure that all contract laborers working in the premises are immediately sent to main security gate.

They will receive further instructions from main controller. All should gather at safe assembly

points after assessing the wind direction (from the wind sock, stack of boiler chimney) and wait for

further instructions which will be communicated through PA system or by other available means.


9) All fabricator contractors should ensure that all welding machines are switched off and all cylinders

are closed before leaving the working area.

10) All civil contractors should be gathered at assembly points after declared emergency.

7.2.7.6 MITIGATION OF CONSEQUENCES DURING MAJOR ACCIDENT

No major hazard installation can ever be absolutely safe. Even if a hazard assessment has been carried out,

if the hazards have been detected and appropriate measures have been taken, the possibility of an accident

cannot be completely ruled out. So safely systems provide measures, which can mitigate the consequences

of accident or emergency situation. In order to be able to initiate counter measures in the event of an

accident, company shall install various safety systems to mitigate the consequences during Major Accident

are as under:

(1) Emergency Control members available round the clock in all plants

(2) ECC room with full equipped with Fire Fighting Equipment

(3) Fire Men available in Fire Department round the clock

(4) TAC approved Fire Hydrant system with electric motor and D.G. Set and water reserved for fire

fighting

(5) QRA to be done by competent party

(6) Alarm System and method of reporting / declaring emergency

(7) Regular rehearsal of emergency preparedness

(8) Training to all employees regarding emergency preparedness

(9) MSDS of all hazardous chemicals are available in safety department and in concerned department.

7.2.7.7 EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTRE WITH LIST OF EQUIPMENT AND

ACCESSORIES

Safety Office in front of Operation Building will act as Emergency Control Center. It is equipped with all

necessary accessories as mentioned below.

(A) DOCUMENTS

- Site Plan

- Disaster Control Plan copy

- List of essential telephone numbers

- List firefighting equipment

- Shift Schedule of Emergency Control members

(B) PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

- B. A. Sets (Breathing Apparatus)

- Face Masks

- Hand gloves

- Gum boots

- Goggles

- Helmets

- Safety belts

- Aprons

- Fire proximity suit

(C) EQUIPMENT LIST

- Internal / External Telephone

- Portable alarm

- Torches

- Emergency Cupboard with necessary PPE

- Artificial Respirator

- Racer watches (STOP WATCH)

- Gas Detector Tube

- Static Charge Meter


7.2.7.8 INFORMATION REGARDING KEY PERSONS AND THEIR RESPONSIBILITIES

DURING EMERGENCY

A. SITE MAIN CONTROLLER

After getting information of emergency, the site main controller will rushed to the Emergency Control

Center immediately.

1) On reaching he will assess the magnitude of the situation in consultation with Incident Controller

and decide whether inside or outside help are to be called (i.e. Fire Service, Police, Ambulance

etc.).

2) Ensure that key persons are called in.

3) Give guidance and direction in vital and important activities to control the emergency situation.

4) Direct to close down and evacuation of the plants in consultation with Incident controller and key

personnel.

5) If necessary arrange for evacuation of neighboring population.

6) Inform the Government authorities such as Collector, MC, Factory Inspector, Health Officer &

medical Officer and request them for their help as situation demands.

7) Give prime importance to human life and guidance in organizing the rescue operations as well as

ensure whether injured people getting proper medical attention in time.

8) Always be in touch with the Incident Controller to get further progress and decide further plan.

9) On completion of emergency situation declare the normalcy through Administrative Officer.

10) Control the re-occupation of the affected areas on discontinuation of emergency.

11) Do not permit to re-start the plant unless it is safe.

12) Give authentic statement of the incident to News Media & Government Authorities.

B. INCIDENT CONTROLLER

1) Take the charge of situation and assess the magnitude of the event

2) Control and guide all the operations with priorities to the Safety of Personnel, minimize pollution,

loss of material and loss to the plant equipment and property.

3) Provide advice and guide to the Fire Fighting and Rescuing squad and Fire Brigade while they

arrive.

4) Establish communication with emergency control center.

5) Report on all significant developments to the emergency control center through phone/Messenger.

6) Ensure that evacuation of the areas in the factory getting affected is complete.

7) After the emergency situation is brought under control, assure that the necessary evidence for

further investigation in the incident is preserved and inform Site Controller regarding control of

emergency.

C. TECHNICAL STAFF / DEPARTMENT HEAD

1) As soon as informed, rush to the spot and take charge of the situation till senior group arrives.

2) Ensure that emergency siren is raised which gives information to Security, Safety, Administration

Staff and Technical Staff.

3) On arrival of Incident Controller, inform him about the gravity of the situation and then to work

under his guidance to control the situation.

4) Ensure that only experienced and essential people remains at the location for controlling, while

others to be evacuated from the scene.

D. EMPLOYEES NEAR THE SPOT (INCIDENT AREA)

The employees near affected area, under the guidance of the Incident Controller shall

1) Tackle the emergency as per laid down procedures for the area bearing in mind the requirements of

the situation called for by the progress of the emergency.

2) Remove all non-essential employees (who are not assigned any emergency duty) shall evacuate the

area and gather at the specified assembly points.

3) Stop the operations as per the information of the Incident Controller.


E. EMPLOYEES OF OTHER DEPARTMENTS

1) On getting information of incident, take permission of superior and confirm own plant, department,

safety and then after trained and skill persons will rush to incident spot with necessary personnel

protective equipment.

2) Approach the spot from up wind direction and assemble at safe place near to the spot taking in to

consideration the wind direction.

3) Extend help to control the situation as per the instruction and guidance given by the senior persons

controlling the operation.

F. PERSONNEL OFFICER

1) When emergency declared immediately rushed to emergency control center.

2) Basically he will work as a Liaison Officer and will stationed at emergency control center during

emergency. He will work under the direction of Site Controller.

3) To ensure that the casualties receives adequate attention at first aid center, also ensure additional

help if require from Government authorities or outside agencies.

4) Arrange transport facility for injured personnel to get timely medical help.

5) He will also arrange for head count at assembly points and will inform Site Controller.

6) Also be in touch with the Security and Other Departments for help.

7) Will check the Roll call from Time Office for availability of trained personnel during emergency

situation at the site.

8) Determine the need to inform statutory authorities of the accident and fill the necessary forms for

submission with consultation of the Site Controller.

9) When emergency is prolonged, arrange for the relief of personnel as well as inform the families of

injured persons and organize refreshments / catering facility.

G. ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICER

1) When emergency declared, immediately rushed to the emergency control center and establish

contact with Site Main Controller.

2) Ensure the communication between site controller and incident controller. Keep messenger for

communication.

3) Make arrangement to send portable megaphone and torches to the Incident Controller if required.

4) On receiving instructions from Site Controller, organize transportation for the evacuation of people

from the assembly points.

5) As per instructions from Site Controller will inform to Head Office, Insurance Surveyor, other

relevant authorities and neighboring areas.

6) On getting instructions from Site Controller / Incident Controller, he will be in touch with other

Industries for help in emergency.

7) Will arrange to announce necessary instructions for all personnel.

8) Ensure that telephone operator keeps the EPABX free to extend possible for in coming calls.

9) Ensure that Press and other Media do not publish unauthentic news.

H. ENGINEERING SERVICES KEY PERSONNEL

1) When emergency declared, immediately proceed to Emergency Control Center.

2) Ensure the availability of electrical wiremen, utility, maintenance employees and drivers.

3) Ensure the water supply & electric power generator in case of power failure.

4) Be in touch with the Site controller / Incident Controller to extend help as and when required.

5) Ensure availability of Light Motor Vehicles as well as Fork Lifts, JCBs etc.

6) Arrange the vehicle as per required by Administrative / Personnel Officer.

I. SECURITY & FIRE IN-CHARGE

1) When emergency declared, ensure that the Fire man in the fire station and Security guards at the main

gate are sufficient.

2) On getting instruction from Site Controller/Incident controller, cordon the affected area to maintain

law and order.

3) As per instruction from Site Controller/ Incident controller, arrange to start the fire hydrant pump.

4) Ensure the following duties by Security Guards;


- Stop all vehicles and visitors entering into the factory, except any Government authorities such as

Fire Brigade, Police, Factory Inspector, Medical Staff and inform the Administrative Officer on their

arrival.

- If any press reporter and local Leader comes at the main gate, take them to the Administration

Office.

- Do not allow any vehicle to park at the main gate or nearby at main road.

- Assure that the entrance of the gate is clear for thorough fare. In Similar way control/ guide internal

traffic for smooth operations.

- Act according instructions given by Personnel and Administrative Officer.

- Ensure that all essential personnel evacuated and assembled at Assembly points.

- Arrange effective security nearby the incident place.

J. FIRST AID ATTENDANTS

1) As per the instructions given by the Incident Controller, arrange the supply of additional emergency

related equipment to the incident place. Give necessary First Aid treatment to the affected persons

immediately.

2) Inform the Personnel and Administration Officer regarding the severity of injury and advise for

further medical help if necessary.

3) Ask for additional trained First-Aider, if required.

4) On arrival of Doctor, assist him to give medical treatment to the affected people.

K. SAFETY OFFICER

1) On hearing emergency siren rush to the spot and assume the position of incident controller and take

care of the situation till a senior personnel arrives and on their arrival work with them in team,

extending their own expertise.

2) Give instructions and guideline to the people involved in control measures. As well as help in

providing required PPE.

3) Give instructions to the safety attendants.

4) Brief the Site Main Controller about the progress of control measures.

5) Advise site controller regarding type of help required from outside.

6) Give instructions to other department through internal phones /Communication Officer.

7) Make arrangement to carry out monitoring whenever necessary and appraise results to the concerned

seniors

L. ESSENTIAL EMPLOYEES AND THEIRS DUTIES

[a] Fireman:

1) On getting information, check the water level in emergency tanks and overhead /under ground

storage tanks. Maintain the emergency tank water level to its fullest capacity.

2) Start fire hydrant pump as per the instruction from Security & Fire incharge.

3) Ensure continuous water supply to the incident place.

4) Do not leave the Fire Hydrant pump house till further instruction

[b] Driver:

1) On getting information from Communication Officer remain alert and wait for further instructions

along with Ambulance van to meet with emergency.

2) Extend help to shift the injured people from site of incident to First-Aid and if required to hospital

through Ambulance / Other vehicle.

3) For material handling take Fork-lift / JCB to the spot if required.

[c] Electrical/Utility Personnel:

1) After getting the information rush to the spot with necessary personal protective equipment and if

instructed by incident controller cut off the power supply to the affected area.

2) Ensure that the D.G. Set is in running condition.

3) Extend help to the Utility Operator in maintaining adequate supply of water and others under

guidance of Supervisors.

4) Water in water hydrant storage tank is in full capacity or not


7.2.7.9 EMERGENCY ORGANIZATION FOR IDLE HOURS

1. SECURITY

i) After getting information through emergency hooter inform at least two senior persons at their

residence by telephone/messenger.

(a) Site controller

(b) Safety Officer

(c) Incident controller.

(d) Technical Staff/Senior Staff

ii) Assure that the front side of the gate is clear for thoroughfare.

iii) Act according to the instructions of Incident Controller/Senior Officers

iv) Inform Emergency Control Center for emergency.

2. SAFETY/FIRST AID ATTENDANT

One attendant remains present around the clock.

Duties:

1) On hearing emergency hooter does not leave the Occupational Health Center.

2) As per the instructions given by the person In charge of the emergency operation or Incident

Controller arrange the supply of additional emergency safety equipment to incident place.

3) Give necessary first aid to the affected person immediately. Inform the site controller about the

severity of the Injury and advice for further medical help if required. On arrival of doctor, assist him

for medical treatment offered to the affected people.

7.2.7.10 LIST OF IMPORTANT AUTHORITIES WITH THEIR ROLE IN EMERGENCY AND

TELEPHONE NUMBERS

List of important authorities with their role in emergency and telephone numbers will be prepared and

listed, same will be placed/displayed at important locations.

7.2.7.11 INFORMATION ABOUT EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

(1) Communication will be through Emergency Central Alarm System

(2) Telephones: An EPABX unit will be installed to connect all departments internally. Company will also

provide mobile connections to all important personnel at site.

(3) STD PHONE & FAX/TELEX: Will be provided at IMP places

(4) IN THE EVENT OF FAILURE OF TELEPHONE SYSTEM:

Communication officer will arrange special messengers for communication Minimum one vehicle with

driver/trained security personnel are available in the company premises round the clock.

We will communicate through our Administration department by our vehicle to nearby community.

7.2.7.12 ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM DETAILS

During emergency it is necessary that the alarm should be heard by all employees wherever they work, for

that speakers will be placed at various locations within plant.

7.2.7.13 OUT SIDE IMPORTANT ADDRESSES AND PHONE NUMBERS

List of important addresses in the nearby area such as hospitals, ambulance services, fire fighting services,

Government personnel (Municipal Commissioner, district collector, zilla panchayat, police station and

emergency control services and their telephone numbers will be prepared and displayed outside emergency

control room.


7.2.7.14 REHERSAL AND UPDATION OF PLAN

1) Every year mock drills will be organized. Shortfalls in actions observed during drill will be explained

to participants and will be corrected accordingly.

2) Any shortcomings regarding On–Site Emergency Plan observed during such drills will be corrected

and incorporated in On-Site Emergency Plan and same will be communicated to all.

3) The On-Site Emergency Plan will be updated after any significant development in factory or change

in the law.

7.2.7.15 INFORMATION OF ASSEMBLY POINTS

At the time of emergency, non - essential workers, casual workers, visitors and others are to be replaced to

Assembly Points and separate in charge are nominated.

In case of an emergency, the visitors, contract persons and factory employees will gather at nearby

assembly point. Pre-designated persons will take their roll call. If needed, they can be evacuated easily

through any gate in a short period as per instruction of site main controller.

7.2.8 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM FOR THE PROJECT

Health hazards associated with the occupation are called occupational hazards. In chemical industry due to

handling of toxic and hazardous chemicals there are possibilities of developing occupational diseases.

Company shall carry out the following checks to curb the problem:

i. Pre - employment medical checkup at the time of employment.

ii. Annual medical checkup shall be done for all employees.

iii. First aid training shall be given to the employees.

iv. Monitoring of occupational hazards like noise, ventilation, chemical exposure shall be carried out at

frequent intervals, the records of which shall be documented.

TABLE-7.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH MONITORING

No. Particular Medical test Remark

1. Pre employment

Check up

Vision, Audiometry, Spirometry, chest

Skiagram, Unrin, RBS, etc.

<30 yrs. Once in five years

31-40 yrs. Once in four years

41-50 yrs. Once in two years

Above >50 yrs. once every year 2. Periodical Check up Spirometry, Urin, RBS, etc.

3. Post employment

check up

Vision, Audiometry, Spirometry, chest

Skiagram, Unrin, RBS, ec.

All precautions would be taken to avoid foreseeable accident like spillage, fire and explosion hazards and to

minimize the effect of any such accident and to combat the emergency at site level in case of emergency.

Some of the preventive safety measures to minimize the risk of accident with respect to Technical Safety,

Organizational Safety and Personal Safety are listed below:

- The factory will take all reasonably practicable measures to minimize the risk of such accident in

compliance with the legal obligation under the relevant safety.

- All building plans and installations are as per relevant acts and duly approved by competent

government authorities.

- Process and Equipment will be designed by qualified and experienced professionals and fabricated to

applicable national / international codes with stage wise inspection.

- Safety features such as fire extinguisher and suitable Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall be

provided. Regular operations and testing of fire extinguishers shall be carried out.

- Periodic inspection and testing of pressure vessels, equipment, machineries and equipment handling

substances.

- Training of workers and Staff for firefighting, work permit system, first aid, safe handling of

materials and integrating safety, in all activities.


- Accident / Incident reporting system and information of employees about the same for better

awareness.

- Suitable notices / boards displayed at several locations indicating appropriate hazards warning as well

as DOs and DON’T for ensuring operational and personal Safety for information of workers / staff

and visitors.

For the safety of the workers, personal protective equipments like hand gloves, helmets, safety shoes,

goggles, aprons etc. & Ear protecting devices like earplugs/earmuffs will be provided. Nose mask will be

provided at places, where there is possibility of dust generation.

Company shall adequately install fire-fighting system in different sections of the plant.

Some of the safeties precautionary measures shall be taken for manufacturing process are listed below:

i. Safety Relief Valve, Rupture disk, temperature scanner, pressure indicator, and flow meter will be

installed to vessel wherever required.

ii. Cooling / Chilling water circulation arrangement will be provided to avoid abrupt increase of pressure

and control heat and high temperature.

iii. Auto control system (ACS) to Monitor & Control.

iv. Vent will be connected with scrubber as per the requirement.

v. PPE will be provided to workers during charging of various raw materials and exhaust ventilation lines

will be provided as per requirement.

vi. Necessary interlocking and alarm system will be installed wherever required.

MEDICAL AID SCHEME

For outside help, company authority will make a mutual understanding with the following authorities to

extend their help whenever an emergency occurs;

(1) Doctors from Civil Hospital

(2) Police Station

(3) Fire Brigade

Time to time company shall inform/impart training to concerned employees for awareness about chemicals

and its hazards and the precautionary measures on their part.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 8

PROJECT BENEFITS 8.1 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE The beneficial impact of proposed expansion project on the civic amenities will be substantial after the

commencement of project activities. The basic requirement of the community needs will be strengthened by

extending healthcare to the community, building/strengthening of existing roads in the area which will help

in uplifting the living standards of local communities. The proposed project is going to come near Chhatral

industrial area and the area which is engaged with industrial activities i.e. Kadi GIDC and Kalol GIDC.

Infrastructure in this region is already developed and upcoming industries will make positive impacts for

the development of the infrastructure.

8.2 SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The proposed expansion project will bring development in the social infrastructure through CSR activities and employment generation.

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) The goal of CSR is to assess needs of local community and be accountable to internal and external

stakeholders at all levels for smooth performance, of the organisation, transparency and social

responsibility. The corporate unit has to comply with and work towards such goals. The proposed project

realizes the social and environmental impacts that the proposed unit will bring about and accordingly devise ways and means to minimize the risks and maximize the opportunities/benefits associated with it.

Implementation of CSR activities is a very challenging task which M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories is

interested to take up with consistency and determination. The Company plans the implementation of chosen

initiatives and follows through with commitment across the organization to make this happen and ensures

that implementation will be successful, with resources, milestones, measurement, and accountability. The

Industry intends to undertake CSR activities in and around their Plant. A total amount of Rs. 13.6 Lacs

would be utilized for CSR programme for five years. Total project cost is Rs. 5.45 Crores and company

would to identify stake holders for the planning of CSR activities and implementation of it. All activities

with its estimated cost is given in table-8.1 for benefitting the society at large and the local rural community

in particular for the period of 5 years after that the company will do as per the regulations.

Plan of Actions The Company will carry out the CSR activities and collect information from the employees about their-

social background, exposure to development issues, skills and ideas, etc. This will help in involving the

interested employees in CSR activities. An initial assessment of current status of all programmes both for

the Company as well as for the Government schemes in the area, it will also collect employees’ background

and interest, funding possibilities, information regarding local Community Based Organizations (CBOs),

None Governmental Organizations (NGOs), local clubs and other partners etc, CSR activities will be

planned with local governing bodies (Gram Panchayats), NGOs and stake holders.

An annual plan or calendar will be prepared on the basis of initial assessment. Indicators for assessing the

progress of initiatives and a systemic database on CSR activities shall be developed with inputs from

employees. The Company shall submit a report of its activities on completion of each quarter in a year. A

strategic review should follow in order to streamline the CSR programs. Basic work space and facilities will

be provided by the Company at its campus. Budget for each activity should be outlined in the annual

calendar/plan. The working contract shall be governed by a Terms of Reference (ToR) mutually agreed by consultant and the Company. CSR activities will have manifold practical approaches which are as follows:

1. Financing Plan The estimated budget for the planned CSR activities is as follows:

en-vιsι�n


In future the responsibilities for all these facilities will be handed over to the Government. A CSR cost

bifurcation for 5 years is given in below table-8.1

TABLE – 8.1 PROPOSED CSR ACTIVITIES

No. Activities Details Total (Rs.)

1. Promote nutrition programme Eradicating hunger, poverty and malnutrition 68,000

2. Drainage facility Contribution in providing drainage facility 2,04,000

3. Safe Drinking Water Facility Provide facility of Safe drinking water 2,04,000

4. Health Care Facility Training, payment of bills and development of PHC 68,000

5. New techniques in Agriculture Tour and/or Training to Farmers 45,300

6. Awareness Programmes Awareness of various Govt. schemes 45,300

7. Construction of Rain Water

Harvesting

Rainwater harvesting structures in nearby villages

and in premises 90,600

8. Promoting Education Setting up secondary schools and vocational training

centers 1,26,000

9. Development of village schools Donation of equipments in schools 90,700

10. Construction of Low cost latrines Construction of low cost latrine for Tribal

coordinating with Government 1,36,000

11. Plantation Plantation on roadsides and in villages 68,000

12. Park/Playground Development of parks/playground 68,000

13. Promote Sports Support rural sports activities 50,400

14. Contribution to the Prime Minister's

National Relief Fund

Socio-economic development and relief and welfare

of the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes, other

backward classes, minorities and women

95,700

TOTAL 13,60,000

8.3 EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES The project will create opportunities for direct and indirect employment for which skilled and unskilled

manpower will be needed. Secondary jobs are day-to-day needs and services to the work force. This will

also temporarily increase the demand for essential daily utilities in the local market.

Indirect Employment: Due to the proposed project indirect employments will be generated. Indirect

employments like; Primary requirements, Grocery shops, Residential requirements, Garments requirements,

Transportation facilities, Health care facilities, etc. These kinds of requirements will increase the prevailing

scenario as the area is not suitable for agricultural activities so this change the employment scenario, which

will generate the indirect employment.

Local villagers of the project will get its benefits more by giving preference to them in relation to direct

employment associated with the various project activities. Construction and operation phase of the proposed

project will involve a certain number of laborers, contractors and construction workers. There is a

possibility that local people will be engaged for this purpose. The operation phase will involve a number of

skilled and unskilled workers. Total employment generation for the proposed expansion project of

pharmaceutical manufacturing unit shall be 100 (19 existing and 81 additional) personnel.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 9

ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

9.1 ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

Environmental cost benefit analysis was not recommended at the scoping stage. Project benefits have been

discussed in Chapter-5 Analysis of Alternatives and Chapter-8 Project Benefits.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 10

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.1 DESCRIPTION OF EMP

Industrial development is associated with a few positive and negative impacts on the environment. The

negative impacts should not hinder industrial development but they should be properly mitigated. An

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) has been prepared for the proposed expansion of M/s. Orbit

Pharma Laboratories to minimize negative impacts and is formed on the basis of prevailing

environmental conditions and likely impacts of this project on various environmental parameters. This plan

will also facilitate monitoring of environmental parameters.

This EMP includes schemes for proper scientific treatment and disposal mechanism for air, liquid and

solid/hazardous pollutants. Apart from this, green belt development, safety aspect of the workers, noise

control etc. is also included in it.

Purpose of Environmental Management Plan Various purposes of the environmental management plan are listed below:

� To treat and dispose off all the pollutants viz. liquid, gaseous and solid waste so as to meet statutory

requirements (Relevant Pollution Control Acts) with appropriate technology.

� To support and implement work to achieve environmental standards and to improve the methods of

environmental management.

� To promote green-belt development.

� To encourage good working conditions for employees.

� To reduce fire and accident hazards.

� Budgeting and allocation of funds for environment management system.

� To adopt cleaner production technology and waste minimization program.

Details of Environmental Management Plan during Construction & Operation Phase for Air, Water & Land

Environment are given below.

10.1.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT

During Construction Phase Construction phase will be for a short period and hence the impacts will also be for a short and temporary

period. During construction activities, mainly emission of dust and gases from movement of vehicles and

construction activity is expected. However, following measures will be taken to reduce/contain such

emissions:

� The proposed expansion project is having Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient unit so there is no need

for constructing any roads.

� Possibility of raising green belt along with construction activity will also be explored.

� Transport vehicles and construction equipments / machineries will be properly maintained to reduce

air emissions.

� Vehicles and equipments will be periodically checked for pollutant emissions against stipulated

norms.

� Idle running of vehicles will be minimized during material loading / unloading operations.

� All construction workers will be provided appropriate PPEs like dust mask, ear plug, helmet, safety

belt etc. and made to wear them during working hours.

� Exhaust vent of D. G. Set will be kept at proper height to ensure quick dispersal of gaseous

emissions.

During Operation Phase The air pollutants in the plant may be classified broadly into particulate matter like dust, fumes etc. and

gases like SO2, NOX, HCl etc. The measure to control the air pollution will ensure the ambient air quality

standards as laid down by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for industrial areas.

en-vιsι�n


The system proposed for air pollution control will provide acceptable environment condition in the working

areas and abate air pollution in the surrounding area of the plant. The technological equipment and

processes have been selected with the above objectives. Depending on quality of emission from different

sources, suitable air pollution control system like Water Scrubber, Alkali Scrubber & Acidic Scrubber will

be provided. The chimney height is as per CPCB norms to ensure ground level concentration of different

pollutants within permissible limit. Details for the control measures are given in section 2.8.6 of Chapter-2.

Environment cell will be formed to look after the implementation of air pollution control measures.

Following measures are proposed to mitigate negative impact of operation phase of the project on the

surrounding air environment.

� Stack height will be provided as per statutory requirement. All the stacks will have Stack Monitoring

Facility (SMF) consisting of sampling port-hole, platform and access ladder.

� Online monitoring system for the pollutants from the stacks with an arrangement to reflect gaseous

emission parameters on company’ server shall be provided.

� Transport vehicles will be properly maintained to reduce air emissions.

� Vehicles will be periodically checked for pollutant emissions against stipulated norms.

� Idle running of vehicles will be minimized during material loading / unloading operations.

� Water sprinkling along the haul road.

� Proper maintenance air pollution control equipment.

� Regular maintenance of vehicles and machinery in order to control emissions.

� A good housekeeping and proper maintenance will be practiced in the industry.

10.1.1.1 FUGITIVE EMISSION & CONTROL TECHNOLOGIES

• Fugitive emissions are emissions of gases or vapours from equipment due to leaks and other

unintended or irregular releases of gases, mostly from industrial activities. As well as the economic

cost of lost commodities, fugitive emissions contribute to air pollution and climate change.

• Fugitive emissions present other risks and hazards. Emissions of volatile organic compounds pose a

long term health risk to workers and local communities. In situations where large amounts of

flammable liquids and gases are contained under pressure, leaks also increase the risk of fire and

explosion.

• Leaks from process equipment generally occur through valves, pipe connections, mechanical seals,

or related equipment. Fugitive emissions also occur at evaporative sources. Though the quantities of

leaked gases may be small, gases that have serious health or environmental impacts can cause a

significant problem.

• To minimize and control leaks at process facilities operators carry out regular leak detection and

repair activities. Routine inspections of process equipment with gas detectors can be used to

identify leaks and estimate the leak rate in order to decide on appropriate corrective action. Proper

routine maintenance of equipment reduces the likelihood of leaks.

Sources of Secondary Emission & Control

Fugitive emissions from the proposed expansion would be significant as there will be air pollution due to

activities like material handling and transfer points of materials and movement of vehicles. Fugitive

emissions are also likely to occur during leak from pumps, valves and pipes or leak/ spill from storage

vessels/ facilities. Mainly, the loss of Toluene, Aniline Oil, Acetone etc. in form of VOCs are likely to occur

as fugitive emissions from the proposed expansion project. Details of fugitive emission sources, its control

and mitigation measures are given in section 2.9.2.1 of Chapter-2.

Action Plan for Fugitive Emission Control The fugitive emissions of organic chemicals and VOCs mainly occur due to tank breathing losses, Leaking

pipe fitting and valves, during maintenance operations. Though these are not expected to be significant, the

following measures will be followed to ensure compliance and further reductions wherever possible.

• The fugitive emissions in terms of handling losses will get reduced by proper storage and handling.

• Adequately designed storage area with efficient air change ratio, handling & transport facilities

shall be provided for fuel, raw materials & products.

en-vιsι�n


• Raw Materials & Products will be stored in closed containers. These containers will be kept under

the shade to prevent the fugitive emission at elevated temperature.

• Hazardous chemicals will be stored as per standard criteria.

• Periodically monitoring will be carried out as per the post project monitoring plan.

• Internal concrete roads are already constructed in existing plant for the prevention of dust during

vehicular movement.

• Adequate air ventilation system of sufficient capacity will be provided in the entire production

plant.

• Proper ventilation in storage & production area shall be ensured and all materials must be stored in

suitable packing to prevent contamination of air due to particulates & volatile emissions from

storage container & area.

• Enclosed system & efficient procedures for materials charging shall be ensured.

• Procedures for start-up shut down, operation & maintenance procedures shall be established &

maintained in all relevant area of works.

• Proper implementation of safety procedures and efficient use of safety arrangements, facilities &

equipment shall be ensured at all time of operation to prevent accidental release of materials & fuels

as well as prevent fire hazard.

• Safety PPEs like dust mask etc will be provided from dust protection.

• The coverage of greenbelt around the plant also acts as natural barrier to stop carrying of dust along

with the wind current.

• Good housekeeping will be maintained in the plant.

• Risk analysis will be done at every stage to identify potential risks and install appropriate

elimination / mitigation systems.

10.1.1.2 Odour Management Plan

Causes of odour will be Methanol, Toluene and Acetone during handling and storage.

• Better management to avoid staling.

• Chemicals will be stored in leak free container.

• Worker will be provided by personnel protective equipments.

• Avoiding the solid/hazardous waste storage inventory.

• Spraying of chemicals wherever required to avoid odour.

• During ETP operation, drastic change in influent COD can kill the micro-organisms & produce foul

smell. To avoid this scenario, quality of influent waste water (COD, temperature, pH etc.) shall be

maintained within desired limit.

10.1.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT

During Construction Phase Ground water will be utilized for the construction of proposed expansion project. Small amount of water

will be required for the construction. Hence, no major impact on existing water resources of the study area

is envisaged. Site engineer will monitor all the activities at site and manage for resources. Proper and

sufficient sanitary facilities will be provided to construction workers to maintain all hygienic conditions at

site. Storm water drain compatible with the local hydrological pattern of the area, is provided to carry-off,

any run-off or storm water from the premises. Care should be taken during construction work & will not

create any obstruction/dips in the topography which can lead to accumulation of water within premises

leading to undesirable consequences like health and hygiene problems, etc.

During Operation Phase Total water requirement for the proposed expansion project would be 65 KLD (fresh 60 KLD + 5 KLD

reused) which will be sourced from ground water using bore well. Water conservation measures shall be

taken to optimize the fresh water requirement. M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories Pvt. Ltd. While industrial

effluent around 27.65 KLD will be generated. Total effluent will be segregated into two streams i.e. high

COD and low COD. Which will be treated in proposed upgraded ETP and treated water will be evaporated.

And High COD effluent will be sent to common MEE facility at Chhatral. Thus, company will achieve Zero

Liquid Discharge (ZLD). Details of water requirement, waste water generation and its control measures are

given in section 2.8.5 of Chapter-2. Environment cell will monitor for proper operation of ETP.

en-vιsι�n


10.1.3 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

During Construction Phase Following measures are proposed during construction period to mitigate adverse impacts:

� Construction machinery and vehicles will undergo periodic maintenance to keep them in good

working condition.

� All machineries to be used for construction purpose will be of highest standard of reputed make and

compliance of noise pollution control norms by these equipments will be emphasized by the company.

� Feasibility of putting up acoustic enclosure / temporary barrier around areas with high noise levels

will also be explored.

� All construction workers working in high noise areas will be provided appropriate PPEs like ear

muffs and made to wear them during working hours.

� Possibility of raising green belt along with construction activity will also be explored so as to serve as

a noise barrier.

During Operation Phase

Following precautionary measures will be adopted to control the noise level:

� Noise generating sources and their platforms will be maintained properly to minimize noise vibrations

generated by them.

� Personnel working near the noisy machines in different plant locations, will be provided with well

designed ear muffs / plugs (effective noise reduction 10-15 dBA)

� Green belt will be improved to act as a noise barrier.

� Noise barriers / shields in the form of walls, beams will be provided around the units wherever found

feasible.

� Training to personnel will be imparted to generate awareness about effects of noise and importance of

using PPEs (Personal Protective Equipments).

10.1.4 SOIL ENVIRONMENT


Following steps are proposed to take care of impact of construction activity on project land area:

� On completion of civil works, all debris etc. will be completely removed from site to avoid any

incompatibility with future use.

� Other materials like paints; diesel, etc. will be properly stored and handled to prevent any spillage on

land.

� All the wastes will be stored at a designated site within the premises to prevent scattered discharge on

land.

During Operation Phase Hazardous waste ETP sludge shall be sent to TSDF site for land filling & Fly Ash to brick manufacturer or

send to TSDF site. A small quantity of used lubricating oil will be generated which will be properly stored

and reused/ selling to registered refiners. Discarded Container/ barrels / plastics will be sold to recycler.

Date Expired, discard and off specification medicines will be disposed at CHWF/TSDF. There will be no

disposal of industrial waste on land.

10.1.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT


Overall socio-economic effect of construction phase will be positive due to direct and indirect employment

opportunity for the local livings.

During Operation Phase EMP for the Socio-economic aspects prepare in concern with the sustainable development, management

team shall have to develop ideology to give preference local people in recruitment. Management team shall

prepare an annual plan of CSR activities. All these positive contributions to the society will minimize

negative effects. For the implementation of CSR activities,

en-vιsι�n


10.1.6 ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Ecology Proposed project is coming on the existing unit. Thus, no tree cutting exercise will be there and no major

impact on ecology is anticipated. However, possibility of rising of green-belt along with construction

activity will be explored so that greening of area can be started at the beginning of project.

Green Belt Development

Greenbelts are an effective mode of control of air pollution, where green plants form a surface capable of

absorbing air pollutants and forming a sink of pollutants. Leaves with their vast area in a tree crown, sorbs

pollutants on their surface, thus effectively reduce pollutant concentration in the ambient air. Often the

adsorbed pollutants are incorporated in the metabolic pathway and the air is purified. Plants grown to

function as pollution sink are collectively referred as greenbelts.

An important aspect of a greenbelt is that the plants are living organism with their varied tolerance limit

towards the air pollutants. A green belt is effective as a pollutant sink only within the tolerance limit of

constituent plants. Planting few, known pollutant sensitive species along with the tolerant species within a

green belt however, do carry out an important function of indicator species

Apart from function as pollution sink, greenbelt would provide other benefit like aesthetic improvement of

the area and providing suitable habitats for birds and animals.

Selection of Plants for Greenbelts The main limitation for plants to function as scavenger of pollutants are, plant’s interaction to air pollutants,

sensitivity to pollutants, climatic conditions and soil characteristics. While making choice of plants species

for cultivation in green belts, due consideration has to be given to the natural factor of bio- climate.

Xerophytes plants are not necessarily good for greenbelts; they with their sunken stomata can withstand

pollution by avoidance but are poor absorber of pollutants.

Character of plants mainly considered for affecting absorption of pollutant gases and removal of dust

particle are as follows.

For absorption of Gases

1. Tolerance towards pollutants in question, at concentration, that are not too high to be

instantaneously lethal

2. Longer duration of foliage

3. Freely exposed foliage

4. Adequate height of crown

5. Openness of foliage in canopy

6. Big leaves (long and broad laminar surface)

7. Large number of stomatal apertures

For Removal of Suspended Particulate matter 1. Height and spread of crown.

2. Leaves supported on firm petiole

3. Abundance of surface on bark and foliage

4. Roughness of bark

5. Abundance of axillary hairs

6. Hairs or scales on laminar surface

7. Protected Stomata

Recommended Plant Species for Green Belt Development: The following trees and shrubs are suggested for green belt development within the plant premises. The

highlighted species are more suitable for plantation as well as for prevailing dust emission.

en-vιsι�n


TABLE-10.1 RECOMMENDED PLANT SPECIES FOR GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT ALONG

THE BOUNDARY OF AS A WIND BARRIER AS WELL AS TO PREVENT DUST

POLLUTION

PLANT SPECIES LOCAL NAME HABIT TOLERANCE

LIMIT

STOMATAL

INDEX

MODE OF

REGENERATION

Acacia auriculiformis Austrialanbaval Tree Tolerant 10.9 Seeds

Acacia leucophloea Hermobhaval Shrub T 12.01 Seeds

Ailanthus excelsa Moto Aurdso Tree T 13.01 Seeds, shoot, root

cuttings

Alstona scholaris Saptaparni Tree T 15.23 seeds

Azadirachta indica Limbado Tree T 29.2 Seeds

Bauninia recemosa Kanchner Tree T 25.68 Seeds

Bougainvillea

spectabilis

Bougainvel Shrub T 32.53 Cutting

Cassia javanica L. var.

indochinensis

Pink Cassia Tree T - Seeds

Cordia sebastiana Scarlet Cordia

Orange Geiger tree

Tree T - Seeds

Delonix regia Gaulmor Tree S 1438 Seeds/cuttings

Kegelia Africana Tabudiyo Small

tree

T 12.90 Seeds

Lowsonia intermis menthi Shrub T 17.0 Seeds/cuttings

Mangifera indica Ambo Tree S 30.77 Seeds/

budding/grafting

Melia azadirachta Bakan limdo Tree T - Seeds /stem cutting

Nerium indicum Lalkaren Shrub T 15.7 Cutting

Peltophorum

pterocarpum

Sonmukhi Tree T 16.78 Seeds

Plumeria obtuse L Chambo Tree T -- Cutting

Plumeria rubra l. Champo Tree T Cutting

Polyathia longifolia Asopalav Tree Sensitive 22.27 Seeds

Pongamia pinnata Karanji

Prosopis cineraria Khyigdo Tree T 18.1 Seeds/root suckers

Salvadora oleoides

Decne

Piludi Tree - Seeds/ cuttings

Salvadora persica L. Piludi Tree T - seeds

Spathodea

campanulata

Scarlet-bell tree Tree T 24.84

Senna siamea Lam. Kasida Tree T 21.2 Seeds

Terminalia catapppa Desi Badam Tree T 20.9 seeds

Thespesia populnea L. Paras pipalo Tree T 29.81 Seeds/ cuttings

Thevetia peruviana Pili karan Shrub T 27.8 Seeds

T: Tolerant S- sensitive, (--) =Not available

Sources: CPCB (March, 2000) Guidelines for developing green belts PROBES/75/1999-2000

TABLE-10.2 LIST OF SUITABLE ORNAMENTAL CLIMBERS/ SHRUBS AS PLANTATION

INSIDE THE GARDEN AND OPEN SPACES BETWEEN DIFFERENT UNITS OF

PROJECT SITE FAMILY SCIENTIFIC NAME COMMON ENGLISH

NAME

FLOWERING

SEASON

Bignoniaceae Bignonia ventusa Golden shower Jan-Feb

Bignonia capreolata Trumpet Flower March-April

Bignonia unguis –cati Cat’s claw April

Bignonia speciosa Handsome flower March April

Tecoma satans Yellow bell Throughout the year

Tecoma radicans Trumpet vine Throughout the year

Caesalpiniaceae Caesalpinia pulcherrima Peacock flower April-June

Ixora coccinea Scarlet Ixora Throughout the year

Ixora rosea Pink Ixora Aug-Sept

en-vιsι�n


FAMILY SCIENTIFIC NAME COMMON ENGLISH

NAME

FLOWERING

SEASON

Rubiaceae

Ixora parviflora Small Flowered Ixora March-April

Ixora barbata Brarded Ixora April-May

Ixora lutea Yellow Ixora Throughout the year

Euphorbiaceae Euphorbia pulcherrima Christmas Flower Dec-Jan

Apocynaceae Thevetia peruviana Trumpet Flower Throughout the year

Alemanda nerifolia - April-June

Nerium Indicum Oleander Throughout the year

Catharanthus roseus Periwinkle

Malvaceae Hibiscus mutabilis Changeable rose September-October

Hibiscus schizopetalus Coral Hibiscus April-September

Hibiscus rosa –sinensis Chinese Rose Throughout the year

Nyctaginaceae Bougainvillea spectabilis and

different varieties

Throughout the year

With seasonal bloom

Guidelines for Plantation

The plant species identified for greenbelt development can be planted using pitting technique. Width of the

green belt in the available land area may prove difficult for many industries to attain for on eor more

reasons. Hence it can be decided to have green belt in places available around the industry (source oriented

plantation) as well as around the nearby habituated area (receptors oriented plantation).

The choice of plats for green belt should include shrubs and trees. The intermixing of trees and shrubs

should be such that the foliage area density in vertical is almost uniform.

The pit size has to be either 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm or 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm. Bigger pit size will be

considered at marginal and poor quality soil. Soil used for filling the pit should be mixed with well

decomposed farm yard manure or sewage sludge at the rate of 2.5 kg (on dry weight basis) and 3.6 kg (on

dry weight basis) for 45cm x 45 cm x 45 cm and 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm size pits respectively. The filling

of soil has to be completed at least 5-10 days before actual plantation. Healthy sapling of identified species

should be planted in each pit with the commencement of monsoon. Provision for regular and liberal

watering during the summer period during the commissioning stage of the plant will be arranged from the

local available resources. After the proposed plant became operational, the authorities responsible for

plantation will also make adequate measures for the protection of the saplings

The trees and shrubs selected from the above mention list based on its availability shall be, planted as

greenbelt of 10-20 m width around the plant boundary. The plantation will be in this recommended pattern:

TABLE-10.3 BUDGETARY OUTLETS OF GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT FOR FIVE YEARS

SR. NO. YEAR NO. OF PLANTS BUDGET (RS.)

1 1st Year 190 96,000

2 2nd Year 130 64,000

3 3rd

Year 130 64,000

4 4th Year 65 32,000

5 5th

Year 65 32,000

TOTAL 580 2,88,000

10.1.7 HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Rain Water Harvesting Scheme

Introduction Gandhinagar district is covered with quaternary alluvium formation of Cambay basin. Rocky area is not

found in this district. The alluvial formation is made up of multi-layer sand, silt and clay formation.

Alluvium thickness is more in western side of the district, while less in eastern side. Silt, clay dominates

alluvium found in the northwest side while coarse-grained sand with gravels is common in the eastern part.

Tertiary clay (Blue clay) occurs at different depths in the area. It demarcates the potable water boundary,

below which water quality deteriorates. In the eastern part it occurs at very shallow depth i.e. at 40 to 50 mts

restricting drilling depth up to that depth. Ground water occurs in semi-confined to confined and in un

confined conditions. Total depth of the bore in east side is ranging from 50 to 180 Mts., while in northwest

en-vιsι�n


side, depth of the bore varies from 200 to 350 Mts. Presently village water supply schemes are mainly based

on ground water through tubewells. Water level of the district is depleting very fast due to less recharge and

un-controlled withdrawal.

Water Balance The water requirement for various uses in the plant will be fulfilled by groundwater water supply extracted

from bore well. The water consumption is described in table below:

TABLE-10.4 WATER REQUIREMENT

The effective area available for the rainwater harvesting is tabulated in the table-10.5. The effective area is

considered on the basis of rain water harvesting comes in contact with other possible contaminants.

TABLE-10.5 RAINWATER AVAILABLE FOR HARVESTING

SR.

NO. DESCRIPTION

TOTAL

AREA

(m2)

EFFECTIVE AREA

CONSIDERED FOR

RAINWATER

HARVESTING

(m2)

AVERAGE

ANNUAL

RAINFALL

(m)

COEFFICIENT

AVAILABLE

FOR

RAINWATER

HARVESTING

(m3)

1 Green belt 2332.0 2332.0 0.846 0.20 394.5

2 Paved area 1200.0 1200.0 0.846 0.60 609.1

3 Roof top area 1589.8 1589.8 0.846 0.90 1210.5

4 Open area 1762.7 1762.7 0.846 0.20 298.24

Total 2512.34

The rainwater available for harvesting is calculated 2,512.24 m3 per annum (table-10.5). The consumption

of water is total 18,000 m3 per annum (table-10.4). Table-10.6 shows the water balance calculation, it is

apparent that the water available for roof top rainwater harvesting is less than the water consumption per

annum.

TABLE-10.6 WATER BALANCE

WATER REQUIREMENT

(m3/ANNUM)

RAINWATER AVAILABLE FOR

HARVESTING (m3/ANNUM)

WATER BALANCE

(m3/ANNUM)

18000 2512.24 -15487.7

Total fresh water required per year 18,000 KL. As per the norms of CGWA for 200% recharge we have to

recharge 36,000 KL. Studying the area & aquifer in the surrounding area and the existing bore wells, we

conclude that one recharge bore well can intake 9,000 liters per hours. So considering 30 days of rainfall we

can conclude one recharge bore well capacity will be 6,480 KL.

As per rainwater collection in premises 2,652 KL/Yr the unit has to be constructed one recharge Borewell in

premises. Approximate seven recharge bore well has to be constructed which will recharge approximate

36,000 KL/Yr. Total volume of water to be recharge as per 200% norms for over exploited zone can be

sufficed by seven recharge borewell. One in premises & six remaining in nearby village or in Village Lake.

The N.O.C from required authorities of village for RWH will be obtained.

SR.

NO. PARTICULARS

WATER

REQUIREMENT

m3/DAY

NO. OF DAYS

FOR

CONSUMPTION

TOTAL

m3/year

1 Industrial requirement 49 300 14,700

2 Domestic requirement 5.00 300 1,500

3 Green Belt requirement 6 300 1,800

Total 18,000

en-vιsι�n


RECOMMENDATIONS FOR RECHARGE BORE WELL.

• One new recharge wells of 200 mm X150 mtrs each should be drilled by DR type of rig with heavy

duty mud pump at the location as shown in the sketch map for rain water recharge.

• Drilling party is instructed to collect strata samples at 06 Mtrs interval of drilling & mud water samples

at 15 Mtrs depth interval of drilling for necessary verification.

• Pilot hole must be electrolloged & pipe assembly should be lowered as per Electro logging results.

• Casing pipe with strainer pipe of 200mm Dia should be lowered into a well reamed bore hole of 450mm

Dia for recharge wells.

• On the basis of the aquifer materials encountered during drilling, the size of the screen should be

decided, varying from 1.0mm to 1.5 as per the grain size.

• Gravel packing in the structure should strictly follow the size of screen recommended.

• The tube well should be cleaned with air compressor till sand free discharge is obtained.

Recommended Specification of recharge bore well.

• A trial bore of 200mmX150 mtrs depth by direct rotary rig with heavy duty mud pump is recommended

as per sketch map.

• Depth : 150 mtr

• Diameter: 200 mm

FIGURE-10.1 THE GENERAL DESIGN OF THE RECHARGE WELL

en-vιsι�n


10.2 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY Following plan for occupational health and safety will be adopted in the plant and details for allocated fund

for the same is given in section 2.5.1 of Chpater-2. Company is following as per factory rules, Form No. 32

(Health Register), Form No. 33 (Fitness Certificate) & Form No. 20 (Certify Surgeon Fitness Certificate)

for health of workers and records are maintained, Samples are given in Annexure-XIV. Company is

following its standard procedure. Regular work zone environmental monitoring to indentify Permissible

Exposure level (PEL) of hazardous chemicals due to fugitive emission is/will be carried out.

� All measures related to safety such as safety appliances, training, safety awards, posters, slogans will

be undertaken.

� The workers exposed to noisy sources will be provided with ear muffs/plugs.

� Adequate facilities safe for drinking water and toilets will be provided to the employees.

� The fire and safety equipment will be properly utilized and maintained regularly.

� The health of the workers will be regularly checked by a well qualified doctor and proper records will

be kept for each worker.

� Restrictions; only authorized employees permitted to enter in restricted plant areas.

� Responsibility: Site appointments detailing specific responsibilities as required meeting regulatory

compliance shall be completed and maintained, within the Health and Safety Management System.

� Site Manager: site manager will has the overall responsibility for all occupational health and safety

activities on the site, and to stop any subordinate from working on site in an unsafe manner.

� Communication: All employees will be encouraged to communicate regarding hazard observed in

plant to any supervisor.

� Toolbox talks: supervisory staff will conduct weekly toolbox talks with employees and address the

application of health and safety rules and procedure to hazards.

� Site rules: site rules prepared and communicated to employees like; induction training, designated

area to wear PPEs, no smoking signs, etc.

� Housekeeping: dedicated area for rubbish dumping bins will be identified and established in every

plant. Usage of rubbish bins will be instructed. Maintaining hygienic conditions in canteens, near

drinking water source and toilets.

� First aid: a first aid box will be provided and allocated to a trained, certified first aider.

� Fire prevention: Flammable materials shall be stored in a suitable location and adequate firefighting

equipment installed in suitable locations around the store. All operations conducted on site shall be

conducted in a manner to prevent the risk of fire.

� Monitoring safety: the site manager staff will monitor safety thoroughly in plant visited and if any

modification observed/identified, necessary action will be taken. Incident and accident will be

recorded and reported to authority.

10.3 CONCEPT OF WASTE-MINIMISATION, RECYCLE/REUSE/RECOVER TECHNIQUES,

ENERGY CONSERVATION, AND NATURAL RESOURCE CONSERVATION Waste-minimisation: Process optimization can be done by using proper technology & maintenance of

equipment.

Recycle/reuse/recover: M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories Pvt. Ltd, in which low COD stream will achieve

ZLD and high COD stream will be send to Common facility for MEE.

Natural Resource Conservation: To conserve ground water, rain water harvesting will be carried out to

store rain for future use and also to recharge ground water.

Energy Conservation: To conserve energy, company will use traditional light bulbs with Compact

Fluorescent Lamps (CFLs) means reduction in usage of 1/4th of the total energy consumption.

10.4 DESCRIPTION OF ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS Description of different Administrative Aspects are enlisted here,

10.4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL In addition to preparing an EMP, it is also necessary to have a permanent organizational set up to ensure its

effective implementation. Hence, proposed plant will create a team consisting of officers from various

departments to co-ordinate the activities concerned with management and implementation of the

environmental control measures. This team will undertake the activity of monitoring the stack emissions,

en-vιsι�n


ambient air quality, noise level etc. either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever

necessary. Regular monitoring of environmental parameters will be carried out to find out any deterioration

in environmental quality and also to take corrective steps, if required, through respective internal

departments.

The Environmental Management Cell will also collect data about health of workers, green belt development

etc. Organogram of the Environmental Management Cell is presented in figure-10.2.

FIGURE-10.2 AN ORGANOGRAM OF ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL

The cell will also be responsible for monitoring of the plant safety and safety related systems which include:

� Checking of safety related operating conditions.

� Visual inspection of safety equipments.

� Preparation of a maintenance plan and documentation of maintenance work specifying different

maintenance intervals and the type of work to be performed.

Other responsibilities of the cell will include:

� Conduct and submit annual Environmental Audit Report. A SPCB registered agency will be retained

to generate the data in respect of air, water, noise and soil and prepare the Environmental Audit

Report. Timely renewal of Consolidated Consents & Authorization (CC & A) will also be taken care

of.

� Submitting environmental monitoring report to SPCB. Data monitored by the cell will be submitted to

the Board regularly and as per the requirement of SPCB. The cell will also take mitigate or corrective

measures as required or suggested by the Board.

� Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the conclusions / results of monitoring

activities and proposes measures to improve environment preservation and protection.

� Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on safety practices. A

qualified and experienced safety officer will be responsible for the identification of the hazardous

conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advise on corrective actions, organize training programs

and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health.

� Conducting safety and health audits to ensure that recommended safety and health measures are

followed.

10.4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY The Company has an environment policy approved by the Director which is attached as annexure-XI. The

standard Operating procedure will be prepared after implementation of the project.

10.4.3 REPORTING SYSTEM TO THE DIRECTORS A responsible person or officer collect the Environmental and safety compliance data and submit it to their

manager & he/she submit a signed Environmental and safety compliance report to the Directors. Any

Environment related non compliances / violations / notices will be taken as immediate action.

Vice President – General

General Manager - Works

Manager – EHS

Operators – ETP / MEE / RO.

Executives– ETP / MEE / RO

Medical Assistance – OHC

Jr. Executive – F & S.

en-vιsι�n


10.4.4 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP Adequate budgetary provisions have been made by M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories Pvt. Ltd. Management

for execution of environmental management plans. The details of capital and recurring (per annum) budget

earmarked for pollution control / monitoring equipment; operation and maintenance of pollution control

facilities, for greenbelt development and maintenance will be as given in table-10.7.

TABLE-10.7 COST OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES (RS. IN LAKHS)

NO. PARTICULARS CAPITAL COST

(RS. IN LACS.)

RECURRING COST

(RS. IN LACS. PER

ANNUM)

1. Air & Noise Pollution Control 10 0.8

2. Water Pollution Control 58 6.8

3. Environment Monitoring &

Management 1.25 1.6

4. Occupational Health 1.5 0.3

5. Green Belt 2.5 0.5

TOTAL 73.25 10

10.5 OCCUPATIONAL WORK ZONE MONITORING The Company is having its existing practice for monitoring of hazardous chemicals in work zone area. Work

zone monitoring is being carried out by third party monitoring laboratory. Hazardous chemicals and sampling

locations identified to monitor its concentration and records are being kept as per Gujarat Factories Rules. The

Company has proposed monitoring programme to monitor the concentration of chemicals in work zone

environment.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 11

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

11.1 INTRODUCTION M/s. Orbit Pharma Laboratories is proposed expansion project in Pharmaceutical and Bulk Drug unit at

Block No. 155/1, 159, Chhatral-Kadi Road, Village Dhanot, Taluka Kalol, District Gandhinagar, Gujarat.

11.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

11.2.1 PROJECT DETAILS

Category of the project A (Outside the Notified Industrial Area)

S. No. In the schedule 5(f), Synthetic Organic Chemicals as per EIA Notification dated

14th September, 2006 & its amendment dated 1st December, 2009

Location of the project Block No. 155/1, 159, Chhatral-Kadi Road, Village Dhanot,

Taluka Kalol, District Gandhinagar, Gujarat

Project cost for proposed expansion

project Rs. 5.45 Crores.

Cost for EPCM (Environmental

Pollution Control Measures)

Total capital cost of pollution control measures will be Rs. 73.25

lacs & recurring cost per annum will be 10 lacs.

11.2.2 PROJECT REQUIREMENT

Land requirement Company is having 7066 sq. m. of private land area. No new land is required

for the proposed expansion project.

Water requirement & its

source • Total water requirement will be 65 KLD (60.0 KLD fresh + 5.0 KLD

reused).

• Out of 60 KLD, 6 KLD will be used only for greenbelt development & 5 KLD

for domestic purpose.

• 49 KLD water will be required for industrial purpose (boiler, cooling tower, for

process, washing & others).

• Entire water will be sourced from ground water using bore well & permission

is under process from the Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA).

Electricity requirement &

its source • Total power requirement will be 260 KW (60 KW existing + 200 KW

proposed) will be sourced from UGVCL (Uttar Gujarat Vij Company

Limited).

• During emergency purpose one .D. G. Set of 100 KVA and additional one

number of .D. G. Set of 250 KVA will be utilized.

Manpower requirements • For proposed expansion project total 100 (existing 19 and additional 81)

personnel will be required.

• Out of total 30 personnel will be on contract basis.

• Preference will be given to local people on the ground of qualification.

• Local people will be hired for construction work so labor colony will not be

required.

• Existing facility will be utilized for their requirements. During operation

phase rest rooms and sanitation facilities will be provided for truck drivers if

required.

Fuel requirement & its

source No. Fuel Existing Proposed Total Remark

1 Wood Waste/

Agro waste/ Coal 300 Kg/Day

2,700

Kg/Day

3000

Kg/Day

For Boiler & Hot Air

Generator

2 Coal - 1,800

Kg/Day

1800

Kg/Day

For Thermic Fluid Heater

3 Diesel 8 Lit/Day 20 Lit/Day 28 Lit/Day For DG Sets

en-vιsι�n


11.2.3 RAW MATERIALS


1. 2,6-Dichlorophenol 69.81

2. Potassium Carbonate 31.30

3. Toluene 184.79

4. Methyl Mono Chloro Acetate (MMCA) 48.86

5. Aniline Oil 38.39

6. Chloro Acetyl Chloride (CAC) 62.83

7. Alluminium Chloride 43.18

8. Carbon 2.68

9. Acetic acid 19.82

10. Diethyle Amine 0.72

11. Hydrochloric Acid 15.13

12. 4 Chloro-2 Aminophenol 2.73

13. Urea 3.28

14. Hydro Sulphide of Soda 0.03

15. Caustic Lye 23.90

16. Methanol 229.34

17. 4-Chloro-2- Nitro Aniline 12.20

18. Thiophenol 7.32

19. Ferric Chloride 0.37

20. Hydrazine Hydride 9.76

21. Hydrogen Cynamide 7.32

22. Methyl Chloro Formate 8.54

23. Dimethyl Sulxoxide 0.55

24. Hydrogen Peroxide 1.60

25. Acetone 30.94

26. N(4-5) Dicloro-2 Nitro Phenyl Acetamide 2.38

27. Dimethyl Formamide (DMF) 2.38

28. 2:3 Dichloro Phenol 2.38

29. Nitrogen Gas 0.12

30. Hydrogen Gas 0.15

31. Raneynickel 0.26

32. Hyflow 0.10

33. Potassium Hydroxide 1.79

34. Calcium Disulphide 0.86

35. Dimethyl Sulfate 1.98

36. Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) 0.24

37. Methoxy Acetyl Chloride 0.59

38. Methylene Dichloride 16.37

39. Xylene 6.22

40. Thiourea 0.59

41. 1-Decylbromide 1.19

42. Methychloro Formate 1.33

43. 1-1 Cyclohexane Diacetic Acid 1.80

44. Liq. Bromine 1.17

45. Caustic Soda Flakes 11.78

46. Trietylamine 0.50

47. 1,3 Cyclohexadione 0.95

48. Phenyl Hydrazine 1.01

49. Zinc Chloride 0.95

50. Phosphorous Trichloride 1.52

51. Closantel Amine 3.03

en-vιsι�n



52. 3:5 DiIodosalicylic acid 4.24

53. Sodium Metal 3.18

54. Caustic Potash 1.52

55. Catalyst 0.23

56. Para Formaldehyde 1.14

57. 2-Methylimidazole 0.65

58. Liq. Ammonia 0.79

The raw materials will be purchased from the local market and transported through trucks to the project

site. Approximately 80 numbers of trucks per month will be required for transportation of raw material,

finished goods and hazardous wastes, etc.

11.2.4 WASTE WATER GENERATION AND MANAGEMENT In existing scenario 4.1 KLD waste water is generating which includes 0.65 KLD domestic waste water and

remaining 3.45 KLD is industrial effluent. Domestic waste water is disposed through septic tank/soak pit.

While industrial effluent is treated in ETP and after treatment it is evaporated through single stage

evaporator.

After the proposed expansion, around 31.3 KLD waste water will be generated. Domestic waste water will

be generated around 3.65 KLD and disposed through septic tank/soak pit. While industrial effluent around

27.65 KLD will be generated. Total industrial effluent will be segregated into two streams i.e. high COD

and low COD. Low COD stream will be treated in proposed upgraded ETP and treated water will be

evaporated through single stage evaporator. High COD effluent will be sent to common MEE facility at

Chhatral. Thus, company will achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD).

11.2.5 AIR EMISSION AND AIR POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES

Details of air pollution control measures given in the following.

No. Stack Attached To Fuel Used Stack Height Pollution Control


EXISTING SCENARIO

1. Boiler * (1TPH) Wood Waste/ Agro

waste / 300 kg/Day

30 meter Multi Cyclone SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm

3

SO2 ≤ 100 ppm

NOX ≤ 50 ppm 2. Hot Air Generator 8 meter -

3. D.G Set (Stand By)

100 KVA Diesel 8 Lit/Hr 30 meter

Acoustic

Enclosures

SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3

SO2 ≤ 100 ppm

NOX ≤ 50 ppm

PROPOSED SCENARIO

1. Boiler *

(2TPH)

Coal/ Agro waste /

2700 kg/Day 30 meter Multi Cyclone

SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3

SO2 ≤ 100 ppm

NOX ≤ 50 ppm

2. Thermic Fluid Heater

(2 lac Kcal)

Coal

1800 kg/day 30 meter Multi Cyclone

SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3

SO2 ≤ 100 ppm

NOX ≤ 50 ppm

3. D.G Set (Stand By)

250 KVA

Diesel

20 Lit/Hr 09 meter

Acoustic

Enclosures

SPM ≤ 150 mg/Nm3

SO2 ≤ 100 ppm

NOX ≤ 50 ppm

* There will be a common stack for existing and proposed boiler

PROCESS EMISSION

No. Stack Attached To Stack Height Pollution Control


EXISTING SCENARIO

1. Reaction vessels 09

meter

Water scrubber followed

by Alkali Scrubber HCl ≤ 20 mg/Nm

3

PROPOSED SCENARIO

en-vιsι�n


No. Stack Attached To Stack Height Pollution Control


1. Reaction vessels 09 meter Water scrubber followed

by Alkali Scrubber HCl ≤ 20 mg/Nm

3

11.2.6 SOLID WASTE GENERATION & DISPOSAL Total 6 types of Solid/hazardous waste will be generated from the proposed expansion project.

• Used oil (0.05 MT/Y) will be reused as lubricants in the machineries within the premises only or send to

authorized re-processors.

• Discarded Containers/Barrels/plastic (600 Nos/year) will be sent to authorized recycler after

decontamination.

• ETP sludge (15 MT/M) will be sent to TSDF site.

• Date Expired, discard and off specification medicines (1 MT/M) will be disposed at CHWF/TSDF after giving

proper treatment

• Fly Ash (18 MT/M) and Evaporator salt (5 MT/M) will be collected, stored and sent to brick

manufacturer or to TSDF site.

• Solvent residue (20.35 MT/M) will be sent for incineration.

11.3 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT The baseline environmental quality has been assessed during Post-Monsoon Season i.e 1st October to 31st

December, 2016 in a study area of 10 km radial distance from the project site.

11.3.1 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

The baseline levels within the study area with respect to (PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO, HCl and VOC) terms

of various statistical parameters are presented in tables-3.3. During baseline monitoring, the arithmetic

mean values of PM10 varied between 62.79- 72.86 µg/m3 while the 98

th percentile values of PM10 ranged

between 66.08– 76.01µg/m3. The arithmetic mean values of PM2.5 varied between 30.01– 34.25 µg/m3 while

the 98th percentile values of PM2.5 ranged between 33.01- 37.15 µg/m3. The arithmetic mean value for SO2

was 9.26 – 13.91µg/m3 and the 98

th percentile of SO2 was 12.91- 17.21µg/m

3. The arithmetic mean values of

NOx varied between 17.78–22.43µg/m3 while the 98

th percentile of NOX ranged from 19.10- 25.57µg/m

3. The

arithmetic mean values of CO varied between 0.1– 0.3 mg/m3

while the 98th percentile of CO ranged from

0.2– 0.5mg/m3. The arithmetic mean and 98th percentile values of HCl and VOC are found below detectable

limit (BDL)<1.0.

11.3.2 GROUND WATER QUALITY MONITORING

Groundwater samples from different villages during study period was collected once during monitoring

period and analyzed. pH varied in the range of 7.52 - 7.84, turbidity 1.0 – 1.7 NTU, total hardness 50.9 -

262.6 mg/l, dissolved solids 560 - 1919 mg/l, Sulphate 50 - 285 mg/l and Alkalinity 268 - 476 mg/l.

Chloride varied from 130.6 – 739.2 mg/l. Nitrate and heavy metals concentrations were observed to be

below Indian standard/specification for drinking water IS 10500-1992.

11.3.3 SURFACE WATER QUALITY MONITORING pH varied is from 7.08 – 8.05 the turbidity varied from 1.0 – 4.2 NTU, the dissolved solids varied from 203

- 511 mg/l, total hardness varied between 57.7 – 135.9 mg/l, chloride varied from 43.2 – 291.9 mg/l, the

sulphate varied from 17.5 – 100 mg/l. The nutrient values in the form of nitrate were not observed. The

overall surface water quality was found to be average and the water should be treated before using it for

drinking purpose.

11.3.4 BACKGROUND NOISE LEVEL

The noise level measured in study area at different locations. The noise level at the project site was found

51.6-77.9 dBA in daytime 45.1-68.8 dBA in night time. The noise levels varied in the residential area of the

study area during day time [night time] in the range of 42.3-77.9 (31.9– 69.4) dBA.

en-vιsι�n


11.3.5 SOIL QUALITY The eight soil samples collected from surrounding areas including project site were assessed for physical

and chemical quality parameters. The porosity ranged from 30-74 % and WHC from 29-60 %. The EC

ranged from 700 – 1078 µs/cm. The soil pH varied from 7.7-8.7. These results indicate that in general soils

are saline/alkaline as EC exceeds 800 µs/cm and pH is above 8.1. The OC varied from 1.9-3.5 % and

available nitrogen from 78.2-109.2 mg/kg. The available phosphorus and potassium ranged from 1870-2978

mg/kg and 16.5-62.5 mg/kg respectively. Among basic cations there is predominance of sodium (84.3 to

141.7 mg/kg) followed by calcium (17.8 to 41.5 mg/kg) and magnesium (8.0 to 26.2 mg/kg).

11.3.6 LAND USE PATTERN Land use within 10 km radius of the study area has been determined with the help of satellite imagery, and

broadly consists of settlements, Industrial, Tank/River/reservoir, Single crop, land with scrub, land without

scrub area.

11.3.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY

The study area consist total 52 major, minor villages and urban area. Total population of the study area is

3,87,539 as per census 2011 from which 2,03,998 are males and 1,83,541 are females. Total population of

Gandhinagar district was 13,91,753 having 923 female per 1000 male. While other district is Mahesana, it

had population of 20,35,064. With regards to sex ratio in Mahesana, it stood at 926 per 1000 male. As per

2011 census, the total literacy rate of the Gandhinagar and Mahesana District were 84.16% and 83.16%

respectively, while literacy rate in study area was 72.4%. All villages are having primary infrastructural

facilities.

11.3.8 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT There is no National park, wild life sanctuary present within the study area of 10 km radius from the project

site.

11.4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES 11.4.1 IMPACT ASSESSMENT An effort has been made to identify various environmental, social and ecological impacts due to proposed

project during construction and operation phases considering present environmental scenario as baseline.

The corresponding mitigation measures to take care of the adverse impacts are also discussed in following

sections.

11.4.2 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE & ITS MITIGATION MEASURES During Construction Phase, the Fugitive Dust Emission due to civil work and vehicular movement is not

expected to spread too far as water spraying will be carried out to suppress the dust emission at the site and

as well as on road. The increase in noise levels due to the movement of vehicles will be taken care of by

regulating the movement of vehicles and the impact on the human beings will be taken care of by providing

the working people with ear plugs / ear muffs. During Construction, drainage pattern and water supply

system of overland water flow will not be changed during the site preparation activities. Suspended solids

can be controlled by sprinkling water and by employing enclosures to construction area to allow the

particles to settle down, prior to discharge. During construction period, the project is likely to generate

substantial employment and income.

11.4.3 IMPACT DURING OPERATION PHASE & MITIGATION MEASURES

11.4.3.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT The ISCST3 scientific model has been used to predict the proposed air quality on the environment.

The maximum 24 hourly average GLC’s for PM, SO2, NOx and HCl is observed to be 2.45 µg/m3, 4.17

µg/m3, 1.53 µg/m

3 and 0.03 µg/m

3 respectively at a distance of 1 km in South direction. Sources of fugitive

emissions include storage of chemicals, manufacturing activities, solvent handling, processing vessels,

valves, joints, loading and unloading section, raw material handling and hazardous waste storage area, etc.

11.4.3.2 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

The noise pollution management will be taken up in the following manner;

- By providing noise barrier to the noise generating equipment, noise level will reduce below 75 dBA

noise level at 1 m distance.

en-vιsι�n


- Acoustic enclosures will be provided to D. G. set to reduce the noise level.

- Further, Greenbelt will help to reduce the noise level within the plant.

By these measures, it is anticipated that noise levels in the plant will be maintained below 75 dBA.

11.4.3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Total water requirement will be 60 KLD. Out of 60 KLD, 6 KLD will be used only for greenbelt

development & 5 KLD for domestic purpose. 49 KLD water will be required for industrial purpose (boiler,

cooling tower, for process, washing & others) Entire water will be sourced from ground water using bore

well & permission is under process from the Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA).

In existing scenario 4.1 KLD waste water is generating which includes 0.65 KLD domestic waste water and

remaining 3.45 KLD is industrial effluent. Domestic waste water is disposed through septic tank/soak pit.

While industrial effluent is treated in ETP and after treatment it is evaporated through single stage

evaporator.

After the proposed expansion, around 31.3 KLD waste water will be generated. Domestic waste water will

be generated around 3.65 KLD and disposed through septic tank/soak pit. While industrial effluent around

27.65 KLD will be generated. Total effluent will be segregated into two streams i.e. high COD and low

COD. Low COD stream will be treated in proposed upgraded ETP and treated water will be evaporated

through single stage evaporator. High COD effluent will be sent to common MEE facility at Chhatral. Thus,

company will achieve Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD).

11.4.3.4 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT About total 2,332 m2 (33%) area shall be developed as green belt area.

11.4.3.5 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ASPECT Impact on Socio-Economic aspect will be mainly of Population, Migration, Culture, Economic status,

Health, Education, Drinking water facility, Drainage facility, Primary Infrastructure, etc. Due to this project

population growth will be increased for direct and indirect employment related to this industry. With the

increase of population, migration will also increase which impact will be directly on culture of the area. For

the proposed expansion, total 100 (existing 19 and additional 81) personnel will be employed. Moreover

indirect employment will be generated which will increase the commercial and economic status of the area.

As in CSR activity of the project improvement of health facility, education facility and primary

infrastructure facility will be improved which will definitely push up the socio-economic status of the area.

11.5 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME A regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well as performance of

pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are important for proper environmental

management of any project. Therefore, the environment and safety cell will handle monitoring of air and

water pollutants as well as the solid wastes generation as per the requirements of GPCB/CPCB.

11.6 RISK ASSESSMENT The management is very much aware of their obligation to protect all persons at work and others in the

neighbourhood who may be affected by an unfortunate and unforeseen incidence occurring at the works.

Any hazard either to employees or others arising from activities at the plant site shall, as far as possible, be

handled by the personnel of the company and prevented from spreading any further. However in the case of

eventuality the Disaster Management plan adopted may be able to control the situation.

11.7 PROJECT BENEFITS The company shall earmarks funds of Rs. 13.6 lacs i.e. 2.5% of the total project cost i.e. Rs. 545 lacs which

will utilize for the CSR activities for the five years after that the company will utilize the fund as per

regulations. Company will carry out the CSR activities in the field of Drinking water facility, Health care,

agriculture, awareness programme, Rain water harvesting, Education, Plantation, Sports, etc.

11.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN Environmental monitoring of different parameters will be done regularly and the activity will be

coordinated by the Environmental Management Cell (EMC). Mitigation of environmental impact has to be

implemented according to the suggestions and will be monitored regularly to prevent any lapse. The EMC

will be under the overall supervision of the Manager (EHS). The cell will report on a regular basis to the

en-vιsι�n


General Manager. The EMC will prepare a formal report on environmental management and mitigation at

six month intervals. The company will undertake various training programme for improving the

performance of the working personnel. Special training will be arranged in regular intervals to combat

emergency scenarios that may occur during the plant operation.

11 CONCLUSION It can be concluded that on positive implementation of mitigation measures and Environmental

management plan during the construction & operational phase, there will be negligible impact on the

environment. The project in totality may be considered environmentally safe.

en-vιsι�n


CHAPTER – 12

CONSULTANT ENGAGED Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Study for the proposed expansion of pharmaceutical products

manufacturing unit of M/s. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES conducted by,

Name : Envision Enviro Technologies Pvt. Ltd.

Address : 2nd

Floor, Shri Ram Complex, Above Bank of India,

Surat-Dumas Road, Piplod,

Surat-395 007, Gujarat.

Phone : (0261) 2223003, 2224004

E-mail : [email protected]

Website : www.en-vision.in

Status of accreditation with

QCI/NABET : Accredited. Certificated No: NABET/EIA/1417/ IA 003 valid

up to December 03, 2017

Envision Enviro Technologies Pvt. Ltd. (ISO 9001:2008 certified company) is a consulting, engineering

and equipment supplier firm delivering exceptional service and quality to public and private clients in India.

Envision is working with zeal in the field of environmental engineering for more than 20 years. Envision

has a vision of supporting and being a part of development that is sustainable to our environment.

Envision is one of the leading companies as Environmental Consultants providing the EIA study required

for Environmental Clearance from MoEF&CC/SEIAA and NOC (Consent to Establish), CCA (Consent to

Operate) from Pollution Control Board. Envision has a well established laboratory with environmental

monitoring and analysis of environmental parameters (Air & Water monitoring, Waste Water analysis,

Stack analysis).

Envision is also working as consultants, turnkey project executors and equipment suppliers in the field of

Pollution Control (Environmental) Engineering and deals with turnkey projects in Incineration System for

Solid and Hazardous waste. Envision also does the design, construction, erection and commission of Water

Treatment Facility (Effluent treatment plants, Sewage treatment plants, etc.) and Secured Landfill sites.

Envision is the first organization in India that holds Common Plastic Waste Management Facility.

Envision is enlisted contractor with PWD, Goa as Class-I-A (One-A) in the category of Water Supply &

Waste Water Disposal. Envision is recognized as Environmental Auditors and enlisted as consultants and

pollution control equipment suppliers with Gujarat Pollution Control Board. Provide Services in the field of

Structural Engineering, Water Supply Engineering and Civil Engineering. It has national cliental from state

of Gujarat, Chhattisgarh, Assam, Haryana, Madhya Pradesh, Andhra Pradesh, Rajasthan, Goa, Kerala, etc

and international cliental from Dubai and Egypt.

EETPL is Member of Consulting Engineers Association of India, Indo-German Chamber of Commerce,

Society of Environmental Auditors and Consultants, Ahmedabad and Member of CII. EETPL is operated

by Mr. Nihar Doctor and Mrs. Nimisha Doctor, who are actively involved in achieving their vision to be a

significant contributor in the development sustainable by Environment using collective technical acumen to

provide services & equipments and be a part of movement of building Modern India with better

environment and safety aim.

en-vιsι�n


ACCREDITATION CERIFICATE BY QCI NABET

en-vιsι�n


Functional area experts and assistance to FAE involved in the EIA study for M/s. Orbit Pharma

Laboratories Gandhinagar, Gujarat is as follow:

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS INVOLVED IN THE EIA

Name of EIA

Coordinator /

Assignment Head

involved

Functional area experts involved

Functional area Name/s

Ms. Smitha Rajesh

Associate:

Arif Shaikh

LU (Land Use) Dr. Y. Rama Mohan

Associate: Mayur Harsora AQM (Meteorology, Air Quality

Modeling & Prediction) Nihar Doctor

Associate: Smitha Rajesh, Krunal Patel AP (Air Pollution Monitoring,

Prevention & Control) Nihar Doctor

Associate: Krunal Patel, Vaibhavi Kanani

WP (Water Pollution Monitoring,

Prevention, & Control)

Nihar Doctor

Associate: Smitha Rajesh, Mayur Harsora, Prakash

Vaghela

EB (Ecology & Biodiversity) Dr. Manoj Eledath

Associate: Satyendra Singh

SE (Socio-Economy) Dr. Rumjhum Ray Chaudhuri

Associate: Arif Shaikh

N (Noise) Haneesh Panicker

Associate: Mayur Harsora, Vaibhavi Kanani HG (Hydrology, Ground Water &

Water Conservation) Naresh Gor

Associate: Apoorva Ghantiwala

RH (Risk Assessment & Hazard

Management)

Sundararajulu Chinnikrishna Amidala

Associate: Smitha Rajesh Jignesh Patel, Krunal

Patel

SHW (Solid & Hazardous Waste

Management) Nihar Doctor

Associate: Smitha Rajesh, Jatin Wadia

LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING & OTHER ANALYSIS

No. Name of laboratory NABL registration status Role

1. En-Tech Laboratory Certificate No. T-3750 Monitoring and Analysis

ANNEXURES

en-vιsι�n

M/S. ORBIT PHARMA LABORATORIES, GANDHINAGAR, GUJARAT A - 1

ANNEXURE-I

TERMS OF REFERENCE LETTER AWARDED BY EAC

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-I (CONT.)

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-II

LAND DOCUMENT

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-II (CONT.)

LAND DOCUMENT

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-III

TSDF/INCINERATION MEMBERSHIP CERTIFICATE

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE- III (CONT.)

TSDF/INCINERATION MEMBERSHIP CERTIFICATE

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-IV

CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-IV (CONT.)

CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-V

RAW DATA OF AAQM

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-V (CONTD.)

RAW DATA OF AAQM

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-VI

NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS (NAAQS) (2009)

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-VI (CONT.)

NATIONAL AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STANDARDS (NAAQS) (2009)

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-VII

INDIAN STANDARDS/SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRIINKING WATER IS: 10500-1991

Sr

No.

Substances or

Charcter-

Istics

Max

Requireme-

Nt

(Desirable

Limit)

Undesirable Effects

Out-Side The

Desirable Limit

Permissible Limit

In Absence of

Alternate Source

Method of

Test Ci Ref

of

Is: 3025

Remarks

ESSENTIAL CHARACTERISTICS

1 Colour, Hazen

unit

5 Above this,

consumer

acceptance

decreases

25 4 of 3025,

1983

Extended upto 25 only

if toxic substances are

not suspected in

absence of alternate

Source.

2 Odour Unobjectionable - 5 of

3025,198

3

a. Test cold and when

heated

b. Test at several

dilutions

3 Taste Agreeable - - Test to be conducted

only after safety has

been established

4 Turbidity, NTU 5 Above this,

consumer

acceptance

decreases

10 8 Test to be conducted

only after safety has

been established

5 pH Value 6.5-8.5 Beyond this range

the water will affect

the mucous

membrane and/or

water supply system

No relaxation 8 -

6 Total Hardness

mg/L (as CaCO3)

300 Encrustation on

water supply

structure and

adverse effects on

domestic use

600 - -

7 Iron (as Fe),

mg/L

0.3 Beyond this limit,,

taste/appearance are

affected has adverse

effect on domestic

uses and water

supply structures &

promotes iron

bacteria

1.0 32 of

3025,

1964

-

8 Chlorides

(as Cl-) mg/L

250 Beyond this limit

taste, corrosion and

palatability are

affected

1000 32 of

3025

-

9 Residual free

chlorine, mg/L

0.2 - - 26 of

3025,

1986

To be applicable only

when water is

chlorinated tested at

consumer end, when

protection against viral

infection is required it

should be min 0.5

mg/L

10 Dissolved Solids,

mg/L

500 Beyond this

palatability decrease

and may cause

gastrointestinal

irritation

2000 16 of

3025

-

11 Calcium (as Ca)

mg/L

75 - 200 40 of

3025,

1984

-

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-VII (CONT.)


Sr.

No.

Substances or

Charcter-

Istics

Max

Requireme-

Nt

(Desirable

Limit)

Undesirable Effects

Out-Side The

Desirable Limit

Permissible Limit

In Absence of

Alternate Source

Method of

Test Ci

Ref of

Is: 3025

Remarks

DESIRABLE CHARACTERISTICS

12 Copper (as Cu),

mg/L

0.05 Astringent,taste

discoloration of

pipes, fittings and

utensils will be

caused beyond

this

1.5 36 of

3025,

1964

13 Manganese (as

Mn), mg/L

0.1 Astringent ,taste

discoloration of

pipes, fittings and

utensils will be

caused beyond

this

0.3 35 of

3025,196

4

14 Sulphate (as

SO4-2

), mg/L

200 Beyond this

causes

gastrointestinal

irritation when

magnesium or

sodium are present

400 24 of

3025,

1986

May be extended

upto 400 provided

(as Mg) does not

exceed 30 mg/l

15 Nitrate (as NO3-

), mg/L

45 Beyond this

methaemoglo-

binemia

100 - -

16 Fluoride (as F-),

mg/L

1.0 Fluoride may be

kept as low as

possible. High

fluoride may

cause fluorosis

1. 5 23 of

3025,

1964

-

17 Phenolic

substances

mg/L (as

C6H5OH)

0.001 Beyond this, it

may cause

objectionable taste

and odour

0.002 54 of

3025

18 Mercury (as

Hg), mg/L

0.01 Beyond this, the

water becomes

toxic

No relaxation See note

mercury

ion

analyzer

To be tested when

pollution is

suspected

19 Cadmium (as

Cd), mg/L

0.01 Beyond this the

water becomes

toxic

No relaxation See note

mercury

ion

analyser

To be tested when

pollution is

suspected

20 Selenium (as

Se) mg/L


water becomes

toxic

No relaxation 28 of

3025,

1964

To be tested when

pollution is

suspected

21 Arsenic (As),

mg/L


water becomes

toxic

No relaxation 37 of

3025,

1988

To be tested when

pollution is

suspected

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-VII (CONT.)


Sr.

No.

Substances or

Charcter-

Istics

Max

Requireme-

Nt

(Desirable

Limit)

Undesirable Effects

Out-Side The

Desirable Limit

Permissible

Limit In

Absence of

Alternate

Source

Method of

Test Ci Ref of

Is: 3025

Remarks

22 Cyanide (CN-),

mg/L

0.05 Beyond this the water

becomes toxic

No relaxation 27 of 3025,

1986

To be tested

when pollution

is suspected

23 Lead (Pb),

mg/L

0.05 Beyond this the water

becomes toxic

No relaxation See note 86 To be tested

when pollution

plumbosolvenc

y is suspected

24 Zinc (as Zn),

mg/L

5 Beyond this limit it

can cause astringent

taste and an

opalescence in water

15 39 of

3025,1964

To be tested

when pollution

is suspected

25 Anionic

detergents mg/L

(as MBAS)

0.2 Beyond this limit

undesirable taste and

odour after

Chlorination takes

place

1.0 Methylene

blue

extraction

method

To be tested

when pollution

is suspected

26 Chromium (as

Cr+6), mg/L

0.01 May be carcinogenic

above this limit

0.05 28 0f 3025 To be tested

when pollution

is suspected

27 Polynuclear

aromatic

hydrocarbons,

mg/L

- May be carcinogenic - 28 of

3025,1964

To be tested

when pollution

is suspected

28 Mineral Oil,

mg/L

0.01 Beyond this limit

undesirable taste and

odour after

Chlorination takes

place

0.03 Gas

chromatogra

phic method

To be tested

when pollution

is suspected

29 Pesticides

mg/L

Absent Toxic 0.001 58 of 3025,

1964

-

30 Radioactive

materials

a. Alpha

emitters Bq/L

b. Beta emitters

pci/L

-

-

-

-

0.1

1.0

-

-

-

-

31 Alkalinity (as

CaCO3), mg/L

200 Beyond this limit

taste becomes

unpleasant

600 13 of

3025,1964

-

32 Aluminum (as

Al), mg/L

0.03 Cumulative effect is

reported to cause

dementia

0.2 31 0f

3025,1964

-

33 Boron (as B),

mg/L

1 - 5 29 of

3025,1964

-

Note: Atomic absorption spectrophotometric method may be used.

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-VIII

CLASSIFICATION OF INLAND SURFACE WATER (CPCB STANDARDS)

SR

NO. CHARACTERISTICS A

@ B

@ C

@ D

@ E

@

1 Dissolved Oxygen (mg/L), Min 6 5 4 4 -

2 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (mg/L),

Min 2 3 3 - -

3 Total Coliform Organisms, MPN/100

ml, Max. 50 500 5000 - -

4 Total Dissolved Solids (mg/L), Max 500 - 1500 - 2100

5 Chlorides (as Cl-), mg/L, Max. 250 - 600 - 600

6 Colour, Hazen units, Max 10 300 300 - -

7 Sodium absorption ratio, Max - - - - 26

8 Boron (as B), mg/L, Max - - - - 2

9 Sulphates (as SO4-2), mg/L, Max. 400 - 400 - 1000

10 Nitrates (as NO3-), mg/L, Max 20 - 50 - -

11 Free Ammonia (as N), mg/L, Max - - - 1.2 -

12 Conductivity at 25°C, micromhos/cm,

Max - - - 1.0 2.25

13 pH value 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.0-8.0

14 Arsenic (as As), mg/L, Max 0.05 0.2 0.2 - -

15 Iron (as Fe), mg/L, Max 0.3 - 50 - -

16 Fluorides (as F), mg/L, Max 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

17 Lead (as Pb), mg/L, Max 0.1 - 0.1 - -

18 Copper (as Cu), mg/L, Max 1.5 - 1.5 - -

19 Zinc (as Zn), mg/L, Max 15 - 15 - -

* If the Coliform count is found to be more than the prescribed tolerance limits, the criteria for coliforms shall be

satisfied if not more than 20 percent of samples show more than the tolerance limits specified, and not more than 5

percent of samples show values more than 4 times the tolerance limit. Further, the feacal coliform should not be more

than 20 percent of the coliform.

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-IX

CPCB RECOMMENDATIONS FOR COMMUNITY NOISE EXPOSURE (1989)

CATEGORY

OF AREA

Leq (dBA)

(DAYTIME)

(0600 TO 2100 HRS)

Ldn (dBA)

(NIGHT TIME)

(2100 TO 0600 HRS)

Industrial Area 75 70

Commercial Area 65 55

Residential Area 55 45

Silence Zone 50 40

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-X

DAMAGE RISK CRITERIA FOR HEARING LOSS OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY& HEALTH

ADMINISTRATION (OSHA)

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE

DURATION PER DAY

(HOURS)

NOISE LEVEL

(SLOW RESPONSE)

dBA

8 90

6 92

4 95

3 97

2 100

1.5 102

1 105

0.5 110

0.25 or Less 115

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XI

ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XII

NOC & CCA OF EXISTING UNIT

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XII (CONTD.)


en-vιsι�n




en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XIII

COMPLIANCE REPORT

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XIII (CONTD.)

COMPLIANCE REPORT

en-vιsι�n



COMPLIANCE REPORT

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XIV

SAMPLE OF REGISTER FORM 32 AND FORM 33

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XV

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT COPY FOR GROUND WATER PERMISSION TO CGWA

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XV (CONTI…)

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT COPY FOR GROUND WATER PERMISSION TO CGWA

en-vιsι�n


ANNEXURE-XVI

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET FOR ALL THE CHEMICALS

environmental impact assessment and emp report - Gujarat ...

Documents

Transcript of environmental impact assessment and emp report - Gujarat ...